Sentrol 2: Maintenance

CNC CONTROLLER
SENTROL 2
MAINTENANCE
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
For Safe Maintenance S-1
Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment

1.How to troubleshoot 1-1
2.ALARM MESSAGE and Treatment 1-2
2.1 ALARM numbers 1-2
2.2 ALARM LIST 1-3
1) PROGRAM MISS (P/S ALARM) 1-3
2) Communication alarm (SR SEND/RECEIVE) 1-12
3) Heat & Power alarm 1-14
4) Over Travel Alarm 1-15
5) External I/O device alarm 1-16
6) Rigid tapping alarm 1-17
7) Servo alarm 1-18
8) SYSTEM ALARM 1-20
2.3 Details of the "401 THERMAL SENSOR ALARM" 1-21
2.4 Details of the "500 ~ 505 STORED STROKE LIMIT ALARM" 1-21
2.5 Details of the "1000~2099 Sequence-related Alarms&Numberless Alarms" 1-22
3. Function and Operation of Alarm History 1-23
3.1 Functions 1-23
3.2 Displays 1-23
3.3 Symbols 1-25
4. NC Functions & Malfunction 1-26
1) Incapable of Operating with Manual Pulse Generator 1-26
2) Incapable of Synchronized Feed (Thread Cutting) Operation 1-27
3) Incapable of Automatic Operation. 1-28
4) Wrong Location of Ref. Point Return 1-29
<How to Adjust the Location of Ref. Point Return> 1-30
5. Abnormalities on Screen 1-33
5.1 Screen Inactivated When Turning Power Switch On 1-33
5.2 Screen Disappears 1-34
5.3 Stripes on the Screen 1-34
6. Power ON Malfunction 1-35
7. Communication Troubles 1-36
Chapter 2 Servo
1. Servo-related NC Alarms (Details) 2-1
Chapter 3 Spindle
1. How to Troubleshoot 3-1
1.1 Checkpoints for Troubles 3-1
1.2 Step 1 3-1
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
Chapter 4 Setup & Adjustment
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing NC 4-1
2. Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage 4-5
3. Volume of Each Printed Board 4-6
4. How to Adjust Screen 4-7
5. How to Adjust Servo 4-8
5.1 Parameter Setting 4-8
5.2 ZERO SETTING 4-9
5.3 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain 4-10
5.4 Adjustment of Overshoot and Undershoot 4-11
5.5 Load Torque Check 4-12
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms 4-13
Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2

1. System Configuration 5-1
2. Configuration of Main Unit 5-2
3. Connector Layouts 5-3
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit 5-3
3.2 Connectors of DKU (Display Keyboard Unit) 5-5
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 Board 5-6
3.4 Connectors of DIO3 Board 5-11
4. Installation 5-14
Chapter 6 Self-diagnosis
1. How to View "Diagnosis" Screen 6-1
2. PLC Diagnosis 6-2
2.1 PLC Signal List 1 (in the order of addresses) 6-2
2.2 PLC Signal List 2 (in the order of functions) 6-37
3. PLC Monitoring Function (PLC Timing Chart Function) 6-47
4. General Diagnosis 6-54
Chapter 7 Parameter
1.Parameter Setting 7-1
1.1 Parameter setting method 7-1
1) Operational parameter setting method 7-1
2) Service parameter setting method 7-2
3) Pitch error compensation parameter setting method 7-3
2. Parameter List of SENTROL2 7-5
Chapter 8 Ordinary Repair

1. Repair Tools 8-1
2. AIR FILTER 8-1
3. Checkpoints bBefore Requesting for After-Ssales Service 8-1
SENTROL 2
Table of Contents
Appendix
1. Basic Interface Connection 9-1

2. DIO3 Board I/O Signal List 9-2
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List 9-3
4. Other Input/Output Signals 9-4
5. Connection of AC Power 9-4
6. Connection of 24V Power 9-4
7.Connection of MPG 9-4
8. FDD Connection 9-5
9. RS232C INTERFACE 9-5
10. LAN INTERFACE 9-6
11. Connection to SENTROL2 MAIN UNIT and DKU 9-6
12. Connecting to SENTROL2 and AC SERVO 9-7
12.1 Connecting to YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMA SERIES AC SERVO 9-7
12.2 Connection with LG AC SERVO(FDA-5000/6000) 9-8
12.3 Connection with HYOSUNG/YASKAWA AC SERVO 9-9
12.4 CONNECTION WITH PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES AC SERVO 9-10
12.5 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES AC SERVO 9-11
12.6 CONNECTION WITH DAEWOO M SERIES AC SERVO 9-12
12.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN AC SERVO UNIT AND AC 220V POWER 9-13
13. CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTROL2 AND SPINDLE UNIT 9-14

13.1 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SG-J SERIES 9-14
13.2 CONNECITON WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SF SERIES 9-14
13.3 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPA SERIES 9-15
13.4 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPJA SERIES 9-16
13.5 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000M3 9-17
13.6 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000MS5 9-17
13.7 CONNECTION WITH YASAKAWA VS626M5 9-18
13.8 CONNECTION WITH POSITION CODER 9-18
14. DNC FUNCTION 9-19

14.1 WHAT IS DNC? 9-19
14.2 Preparation for DNC Operation 9-19
is a registered trademark of CURIOUS, Inc.
(Any unauthorized reproduction of this manual is prohibited.

The exterior and specification of this control device may be changed without
prior notice for purposes of improvement.)
(This manual attempts to provide as much diverse contents as possible. Note, however, that
descriptions of the [This cannot be done] or [This is not possible] type have not been
included to reduce the number of pages of this manual. Therefore, anything that is not
described as [Possible] in this manual should be interpreted to mean [Not possible].
For Safe Maintenance
This manual describes matters requiring attention in relation to the safety of the CNC
equipment to enable Machines where CNC equipment (Machine) is mounted to be maintained
more safely.
Maintenance work for CNC equipment is dangerous for many reasons. Therefore, maintenance
work must be carried out only by personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety.
Depending on the CNC equipment used, some of the functions available in other machines
may not be supported. In this case, just read any warning or caution that does not apply to a
particular Machine and go on to the next section.
For matters requiring attention in relation to Machine safety, refer to the instruction manual
issued by the Machine manufacturer.
In addition, when programming or checking the operation of the Machine during maintenance
work, do so only after sufficiently understanding the instruction manual issued by the Machine
manufacturer and this manual.
Table of Contents
About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes S-2

Warnings and Cautions Regarding Maintenance Work S-3
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Replacement Work S-5
Warnings and Cautions Regarding Parameters S-6
Warnings Regarding Regular Maintenance Work S-7
S-1
1 About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
In this manual, matters requiring attention in relation to the safety of the maintenance
worker (Operator) and prevention of Machine damage are marked with Warning or
Caution depending on the degree of importance. For supplemental description,
Note is also used. Please read the entries marked with Warning , Caution ,
and Note before using the equipment.
Warning
This is used for cases wherein a dangerous situation may occur and lead to death or
result in serious injury to the operator if such situation is not handled properly.
Caution
This is used for cases wherein a dangerous situation may occur and result in minor
injury to the operator or cause material damage if such situation is not handled
properly.
Note
This is used to provide supplemental description in addition to Warnings and

Cautions.
S-2
2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Maintenance Work
Warning
1 When the power magnetic cabinet is checked with the door open
In the power magnetic cabinet is a high-voltage area (part marked with ). Contact
with a high-voltage area may cause electric shock. Check whether the high-voltage
area is equipped with a cover before proceeding with the work. Even if the
high-voltage area has been checked, however, direct contact with a terminal may
cause electric shock.
In the power magnetic cabinet are protrusions such as corners from various units.
Such protrusions may cause injury; hence the need for caution.
2. When Machine operation is checked with the cover opened

Clothing may get caught in the main spindle and cause an accident.
Operate the Machine while maintaining sufficient distance from the Machine to
prevent clothing from getting caught in the main spindle.
Operate the Machine in empty state without engaging in any actual processing. If
actual processing needs to be executed, perform checking from a safe location (the
clamp on the work may come off, or the tip of a tool may break and cause injury
to the operator).
. When work is actually processed, check whether the Machine is being operated
correctly without any tool or work attached using functions such as Single Block,
Traverse Override, and Machine Lock. Otherwise, insufficient checking may result in
damage to the work or Machine or injury of the operator due to an unexpected
movement of the Machine.
. Check whether input data has been entered correctly before proceeding to the next
operation step. In case of error in the input data, either the work or Machine may be
damaged, or the operator may be injured due to an unexpected movement of the
Machine.
S-3
Warning
5. Check whether a value appropriate for the operation has been set for the transfer speed.
Normally, there is a limit to the maximum transfer speed for each Machine. For best
results, follow the instructions in the manual (optimum speed also varies by operation).
6. When using the tool compensation function, make sure the compensation direction and
amount are checked sufficiently. If the Machine is operated with incorrect data, either
the work or Machine may be damaged, or the operator may be injured due to an
unexpected movement of the Machine.
S-4
3 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Replacement Work
Warning
. Be sure to turn OFF both the power on the CNC equipment and the main power
switch in the power magnetic cabinet. If only the CNC power is turned OFF, power
may still be ON for the Servo part; thus causing damage to the unit during
replacement as well as electric shock.
2. For the Servo Amp and Spindle Amp, some voltage may occur for a short while after
power has been turned OFF; thus possibly causing electric shock in case of contact.
3. When replacing a heavy item, make sure that work is carried out by more than two
operators (unit may be dropped, or injury may result if work is carried out by a single
person).
. When replacing a unit, make sure the setup for the replacement unit is identical to that
of the unit being replaced (refer to the manual of the corresponding device for details).
Otherwise, either the work or Machine may be damaged, or the operator may be
injured due to an unexpected movement of the Machine during operation.
S-5
4 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Parameters
Warning
1. When processing a work for the first time after changing a parameter, do so with the
Machine cover closed. For automatic operation, use functions such as Single Block,
Traverse Override, and Machine Lock or check for the correct operation of the Machine
without any tool or work attached. Otherwise, insufficient checking may result in
damage to the work or Machine or injury of the operator due to an unexpected
movement of the Machine.
Caution
2. The parameters for CNC or internal PLC are set up as optimum values. As such, they
need not be changed as a rule. If a parameter needs to be changed, however, do so
only after sufficiently understanding the effect of the parameter.
If a parameter is not set up correctly, either the work or Machine may be damaged, or
the operator may be injured due to an unexpected movement of the Machine.
S-6
5 Warnings Regarding Regular Maintenance Work
Warning
1. Replacing the Backplane for the Memory Backup Battery

Only personnel with sufficient training on maintenance and safety should perform this
work.When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the CNC backplane is replaced,
be sure to avoid contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention
cover attached). In case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
Note
Since a CNC must maintain data such as program compensation amount and parameters,
a battery is used even when power is turned OFF.
If the battery voltage drops, a Battery Voltage Drop Alarm will be displayed on the
Machine control panel or LCD screen.
If the Battery Voltage Drop Alarm is displayed, please contact us for the replacement of
the Backplane Unit where the battery is attached. Otherwise, the CNC will not operate
normally.
S-7
Warning
2. Replacing the Battery for the Absolute Encoder

work.
When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the Battery is replaced, be sure to
avoid contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention cover
attached). In case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
Note
A battery is used to enable the Absolute Encoder to maintain the absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a Battery Voltage Drop Alarm will be displayed on the
LCD screen or AC Servo Drive.
If the Battery Voltage Drop Alarm is displayed, replace the battery immediately.
If the battery is not replaced, the absolute position data in the Absolute Encoder will be
lost. Refer to the manual of each AC Servo Motor maker for battery replacement.
S-8
Warning
3. Replacing the Fuse

Fuses shall be replaced only after the reason for the fuse blowing up has been
ascertained and the cause remedied.
work.
When the power magnetic cabinet is opened, and the fuse is replaced, be sure to avoid
contact with the high-voltage circuit part ( mark or shock prevention cover attached). In
case of contact with an exposed part, electric shock may occur.
S-9
1. Troubleshooting and Treatment
1. How to troubleshoot
Problems are classified depending on the categories below. Based on the classification, perform troubleshooting and
treatment appropriately.
(1) When ALARM MESSAGE is displayed on the screen
1) NO. 714 SERVO ALARM is displayed .................................................. Chapter 2 1 (page 2-7)
2) SPINDLE ALARM is displayed. ............................................................... Chapter 3 (page 3-1)
3) NC-related ALARM is displayed. .........................................................................2.1 (page 1-2)
(2) Problems with NC function and malfunction
1) Cannot operate with Manual Pulse Generator (MPG) .............................................4 (page 1-26)
2) Cannot operate asynchronous move (threading) .....................................................4 (page 1-27)
3) Cannot operate automatically ..................................................................................4 (page 1-28)
4) Home location incorrect ..........................................................................................4 (page 1-29)
(3) Communication breakdown .......................................................................................5 (page 1-36)
For A/S request, refer to 3. Things to consider when requesting for A/S in Chapter 8 (page 8-2). For
ALARM NOS. 1000 ~ 2999 and those with no number, however, request the Machine Maker for after-sales
service.
Contact: TEL. (02) 869-5595

(Ext.) 126
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE and Treatment
2.1 ALARM numbers`
ALARM Numbers Message Reference
0 ~ 299 (1) Program miss (PS ALARM) Page 1-3 ~
(2) Communication ALARM (SR SEND/

300 ~ 399 Page 1-12 ~
RECEIVE)
400 ~ (3) ALARM related to temperature and power Page 1-14 ~
500 ~ (4) Out-of-area ALARM (OT ALARM) Page 1-15 ~
550 ~ (5) ALARM related to external data input Page 1-16 ~
580 ~ (6) ALARM related to RIGID TAPPING Page 1-17 ~
700 ~ (7) ALARM related to SERVO Page 1-18 ~
9000 ~ (11) SYSTEM ALARM Page 1-20 ~
1000 ~ 2999 * ALARM related to machine and sequence Page 1-22 ~
No number * MESSAGE related to machine manipulation Page 1-22 ~
Note) Definitions of terms

1) L line stands for SENTROL2-L (for lathe).
2) M line stands for SENTROL2-M (for machining center, milling).
3) L-Pro stands for SENTROL2-L manuals Programming.
4) M-Pro stands for SENTROL2-M manuals Programming.
5) L-Manipulation stands for SENTROL2-L manuals Manipulation.
6) M-Manipulation stands for SENTROL2-M manuals Manipulation.
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
2.2 ALARM LIST
1) PROGRAM MISS (P/S ALARM)
Number Message Displayed on the Screen Reference
TOO MANY DIGITS OR OVERLIMIT

001 Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits, or
allowable limit inputted
L-Pro Chapter 2 1. NC Program outline
LL USE OF NEGATIVE VALUE Basic address and reference scope
002 Sign -inputted after an address with which it cannot be
used, or two or more - signs inputted M-Pro Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
Basic address and reference scope
ILL USE OF DECIMAL POINT
003 Decimal point inputted after an address with which it cannot
be used, or two decimal points inputted
L-Pro Chapter 2 2. Programming and function
SENTROL2-L table for prepared function
IMPROPER G CODE M-Pro Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
004 Unusable G code commanded
SENTROL2-M table for prepared
function
IMPROPER NC ADDRESS
005 Unusable character inputted in significant area
L-Pro Chapter 2 2. Programming
WORD
M-Pro Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORD
006 Address not followed by appropriate data but by another Basic address and reference scope
address or EOB code
TOO MANY WORDS IN 1 BLOCK

009 Block exceeding 128 characters commanded
ILL MODE GOTO/WHILE DO

011 GOTO statement or WHILE DO statement contained in a
main program in TAPE mode
L-Manipulation Chapter 5 2.
TOO LARGE OFFSET NO.
SENTROL2-L parameter view
012 Commanded offset number too large (allowable maximum
M-Manipulation Chapter 5 2.
number set by parameter #6002 DO1 and OD2)
SENTROL2-M parameter view
L-Pro Chapter 2 1.NC Program outline
ILL TOOL NO.
013 Commanded tool number too large
M-Pro Chapter 2 6. Programming practice
S CODE OUT OF RANGE

020 Spindle speed exceeding the maximum speed while rigid
tapping (parameter #5766???) was commanded
SQ NO. NOT FOUND

021 Specified sequence number not found at the jump destination
specified by GOTO-n or M99 Pn
1 -
L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared

NO P,Q COMMAND AT G70~G73 function
023 Neither P nor Q specified in canned cycle G71,G71,G72 blocks for
Multiple fixed cycle
multiple repetitive cycles
Only L line (G70~G76)
ILL COMMAND IN G70~G76

024 Illegal command in canned cycle G70~G76 block
Only L line

P,Q BLOCK NOT FOUND function
025 P or Q sequence number block specified in canned cycle G70,G71, or
G72 blocks not found
Only L line (G70~G76)

ILL COMMAND IN P-BLOCK function
026 Illegal command in P sequence number block specified in canned cycle
G70,G71, or G72 blocks
(G70~G76)
Only L line
ILL COMMAND IN PROG

G code in group 01 other than G00,G01,G02, and G03, one shot G code
027 other than G04, or G65,G66,G67,M98, or M99 specified in sequence
number blocks designated by P and Q of G70,G71, or G72
Only L line

G70~G73 IN FORBIDDEN MODE function
028 Canned cycles G70~G73 specified in mode other than AUTO operating Other things to consider regarding
mode fixed cycle
Only L line
ILL COMMAND IN Q-BLOCK

029 Chamfering or corner R specified in a Q sequence number block
specified in canned cycle G70~G73
Only L line
PROG NOT FOUND

030 Program whose program number is called by M98,G65,G66, or G/M/T
code not found, or program to return to by M99 code
PROG IN USE
031 Program being edited in the background called for execution in the
foreground
NO RADIUS COMMAND IN G02 G03
032
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST

DUPLICATE NC, MACRO STATEMENT
NC statement and macro statement specified in the same
040 block
CUSTOM MACRO
DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD
Macro call command specified twice or more in the
042 same block
CUSTOM MACRO
DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99
Address other than O,N,P or L specified in the same
043 block as M99 under the macro modal call condition
(G67)
USE G AS ARGUMENT L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared function
Address G serving as macro argument 1)MACRO BY G65
044 M-Pro Chapter 3 20.Custom macro
CUSTOM MACRO 20.1.1Simple call
TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT L-Pro Chapter 3 1.Prepared function
Arguments specified in more than 11 sets in custom 1)MACRO BY G65
045 macro argument specification M-Pro Chapter 320. Custom macro
Simple callB.Acceptance
CUSTOM MACRO designation
CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL
Call mode cancel (G67) specified in mode other than
046 macro modal call mode (G66)
CUSTOM MACRO
ZERO DIVIDED
049 Division specified with zero divisor
CUSTOM MACRO
VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE L-Pro Chapter 3 1.Prepared function
Illegal variable number specified 5) Program macro body
050 Type of variables
M-Pro Chapter 3 Prepared function
CUSTOM MACRO 20.2.3Type of variables
WRITE PROTECT VARIABLE
Variable employable on the left member side of an
expression employed on the left number side of the
051 expression
CUSTOM MACRO
READ PROTECT VARIABLE
Variable employable on the left member side of an
052 expression employed on the right member side of the
expression CUSTOM MACRO
TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING

Multiplicity of brackets () exceeding the allowable
053 range (5 level)
CUSTOM MACRO
ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE
Argument of function exceeding the allowable range
054
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -
TOO MANY SUB, MACRO NESTING

055 Total multiplicity of subprogram call and macro call exceeding
the allowable range (7level) CUSTOM MACRO
TOO MANY MACRO NESTING

Multiplicity of macro call exceeding the allowable range
056 (2level)
CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING END STATEMENT

057 END command corresponding to DO command missing
CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING GO STATEMENT
058 DO command corresponding to END command missing
CUSTOM MACRO
ILL EXPRESSION FORMAT

059 Illegal macro expression format
CUSTOM MACRO
ILL LOOP NO.

060 DO, END number exceeding the allowable range
CUSTOM MACRO
TOO LONG MACRO SENTENCE

061 Macro statement too long CUSTOM MACRO
SQ NO. OUT OF RANGE

070 Sequence number other than 1~99999
CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING OPEN BRACKET

071 Number in open brackets [ smaller than the number in closed
bracket ]
CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING CLOSE BRACKET

072 Number in closed brackets ]smaller than the number in open
bracket [
CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING =
073 Command =missing CUSTOM MACRO
MISSING /
074 Command / missing CUSTOM MACRO
MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

075 Error in macro statement format
CUSTOM MACRO
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

077 Error in macro IF statement format
CUSTOM MACRO
WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR

078 Error in macro WHILE statement format
CUSTOM MACRO
G10 FORMAT ERROR M-Pro Chapter 3

090 Error in format of G10 statement 3. Set data (G10)
ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED

101 After turning on power, move command specified for axes where the
reference point return has not been finished
In the case of G02 and G03, the

program requires correction.
In the case of G90 and G94, alarm
TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS CONTROL AXES
103 More than the required simultaneous control axes commanded
occurs when parameters 1034 and
1035 have the same value. They
require correction as different values
each.
G27 ERROR
105 Axis specified by G27 (zero return check) not yet returning to zero
point
ILL PLANE SELECT

106 Error in plane select command (parallel axes specified simultaneously
or error in parameter #1032 set error.)
FEED ZERO (COMMAND)

107 Cutting feed rate command (F code) as 0
RPR IN TOOL OFFSET

109 Reference point return commanded (G28,G30) specified in tool nose R
compensation mode
OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS

110 Arc where the difference of radius value at start point and end point is
larger than the parameter (#2410) set value specified
ILL LEAD COMMAND

In variable lead thread cutting, K value (lead increase/decrease amount)
111 higher than the maximum command value, a minus value, or higher
than the maximum lead
Only L line On
ILL AXIS SELECTED

112 Error in parameter #5640 set value
ILL DRILLING AXIS SELECT M-Pro Chapter 3 22. Drilling cycle

113 Selection of drilling axes not correctly specified in drilling canned
22.1Table for fixed cycle
cycle
Only M line
1 -
ILLEGAL USE OF G12.1/G13.1

114 Error in condition to start or end polar coordinate interpolation
ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE

115 G code that cannot be commanded in G12.1 mode specified in
G12.1 mode
ILLEGAL G07.1 AXIS

116 Cylindrical interpolation specified on an axis where cylindrical
interpolation cannot perform
ILLEGAL G-CODE USE (G07.1 MODE)

117 G code that cannot be commanded in cylindrical interpolation
mode specified in cylindrical interpolation mode
LEAD *S OUT OF RANGE

118 Feed rate per revolution exceeding the allowable maximum
speed (parameter #1422)
RPR ERROR
When grid type reference point return using digital type position
120 detector is performed, one revolution signal not inputting to Refer to page 1-29 of this manual.
define the grid position while the deceleration limit switch is
turned ON
L-Pro Chapter 3 1.Prepared

OFFSET C START UP CANCEL BY CIR
121 Tool nose R compensation being started or canceled in arc mode
function
.Edge correction
OFFSET C ILL PLANE

122 Plane selection being changed in tool nose R compensation
mode
L-Pro Chapter 3 1.Prepared

OFFSET C INTERFERENCE
123 Cutter interference detected in tool nose R compensation mode
function
Edge correction
OFFSET C NO SOLUTION
124 No intersection point calculated in tool nose R compensation
mode
ILL COMMAND G45~G48 IN OFFSET C
125 Tool offset command (G45~G48) specified in tool diameter
compensation mode Only M line
ILL COMMAND IN G41, G42

In tool nose R compensation mode, chamfering or corner
rounding specified in start up block, cancel block, or block
126 where G42,G41 code is commanded in G41,G42 mode,
respectively, or cutter interference detected when chamfering or
corner rounding is performed
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
ILL ADDRESS
130 Illegal address specified when loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape
MISSING ADDRESS
131 Necessary address not specified when loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape
ILL DATA NUMBER

132 Error in specified data number at parameter setting
ILL AXIS NUMBER

133 Error in specified axis number at parameter setting
TOO MANY DIGITS

134 Number of digits of data exceeding the allowable value when
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape
DATA OUT OF RANGE

135 Data value exceeding the allowable value range when loading
parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape
MISSING AXIS NUMBER

136 No axis number specified when loading parameters requiring
axis specification from a tape
ILL USE OF MINUS SIGN

137 Illegal use of data sign when loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape
MISSING DATA
138 Address not followed by numeric when loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape
PROG NOT MATCH

140 Tape program not matching a program in the memory
G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND

141 Axis not specified, or two or more axes specified in the block
commanded with tool measurement
G37 SPECIFIED WITH T-CODE

142 T code not commanded before the tool measurement command
block
G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED

143 T code not commanded before the tool measurement command
block
1 -
G37 ARRIVAL SGNL NOT ASSERTED

In tool measurement, command measurement position arrival signal
144 ON before reaching the area specified by parameter (#7331~7333) or
not ON before coming out of the area
TOO MANY ADDRESS

150 Two or more of I,(J),K,R commanded in the same block where
chamfering or corner rounding is specified
Only L line
NOT ONE AXIS MOVE WITH-I~R

151 Move command of the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
specified not one axis command
Only L line
MISMATCH AXIS WITH I~R

152 I(K) commanded in X,Z axis move command block, respectively,
where chamfering or corner rounding is specified
Only L line
MISSING VALUE AT I~R

Move distance in the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
153 specified less than the specified chamfering or corner radius amount
Only L line
NOT G01 AFTER I~R

154 Command after the block where chamfering or corner rounding is
specified not G01
Only L line
MISSING MOVE AFTER I~R

Incorrect direction or move distance of the command of the next block L-Pro Chapter 3 1.Prepared
function
155 to the block where chamfering or corner rounding is specified
Automatic chamfering and corner
Only L line R
ILL FORMAT IN FREE CHAMFERING

Error in format of chamfering or corner rounding at any angle
1) ,C and ,R commanded in the same block
158 2) ,C(,R) and C, R commanded in the same block.
3) ,C(,R) and I,J,K commanded in the same block
4) Character other than C and R following ,
MISSING VALUE ATR (FRCHMF)

159 Arc inserted by ??? function cannot be tangent to two lines (radius too
large)
ILL LIFE GROUP NO.

160 Tool group number exceeding the maximum value
NOT FOUND GROUP AT LIFE DATA

161 Tool data of tool group specified in a program not specified
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
OVER MAX TOOL TIMES

162 Data of tool group specified in a program not specified
NOT FOUND T COMMAND

163 Number of tools registered in a tool group exceeding the maximum
registerable number
NOT USE TOOL IN LIFE GROUP

164 H99 command or D99 command is specified when no tool is used
belonging to any tool group.
Only M line
ILL T COMMAND AT M06

165 T command following M06 command in a program not matching the
currently used tool group number
Only M line
NOT FOUND P, L COMMAND

166 P or L command missed at the head of a tool group setting program
OVER MAX LIFE GROUP TIMES

167 Number of tool group to be set exceeding the allowable maximum
number
ILL L COMMAND
168 L command in tool group setting program is 0, or allowable maximum
life count exceeded
ILL H D T COMMAND
169 H, D, T command in tool group setting program exceeding the
maximum value
ILL TYPE OF TOOL CHANGE

170 Error in setting of tool change method
ILL FORMAT AT LIFE DATA

171 Illegal command specified in a tool group setting program
NO TOOL LIFE DATA

172 Tool group specified in a program before setting the tool group data
SPINDLE OTHER AXIS MOVE

175 Other axis move instructions in the same block as spindle positioning
command
SPINDLE NOT ZERO RETURN

176 Spindle positioning commanded without spindle orientation (zero
return)
1 -
Number Message Displayed on the Screen Treatment
G68 FORMAT ERROR When commanding using absolute

180 Error in format of G68 statement value, it must be 2 axes.
Only M line
DUPLICATE COMMAND NC&PLC

190 PLC command specified to control an axis moving as the NC axis as
the PLC axis or vice versa
OTHER AXES ARE COMMANDED

Check the optional function that is
197 Other controlled axes and indexing axis of index table simultaneously
valid for the NC in use.
commanded
NO OPTION Check the optional function that is

200 Option functions unavailable in the currently used NC attempted valid for the NC in use.
2) Communication alarm (SR SEND/RECEIVE)
TH ERROR BAUD RATE must be small.

300 TH ALARM (character with parity error specified in significant Check CABLEs EARTH and
information section) SHIELD.
Same
TV ERROR
301 TV ALARM (number of characters in one block not even)
If odd numbers are not set,
NO.0<TVC>=0.
END OF RECORD
302 EOR code specified halfway in a block
PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR

303 Setting error in the parameter of program restart
PARAMETER NO. 2200<REP>=1

L,M-Manipulation Chapter 3
DUPLICATE PROG
Manipulation in detail
Program whose program number is already used by other program
304 being loaded
9. Function of input and output
with external devices
(only when parameter #2200 REP is set to 0)
B. Program input and output
with RS232C
If the received program has no

NO O, N GEAD OF PROG
number, keys for input and number
305 No O or N address at the head of the program (no program number at
change are selected to enter the
the program head)
program number.
PROGRAM IN OPERATION
306 Same program number specified, with that of the current executing Program number change
program loaded from external I/O device
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
PARAMETER SET ERROR

312 An I/O interface, which is not selected at option, was specified. Or a set
value of setting/parameter related to I/O device.
RX TIME OUT (RS232C1) Other machine must be of the DC

331 No data received within 5 seconds at RS232C interface 1 CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
OVERRUN ERROR (RS232C1)

Make BAUD RATE and STOP BIT
332 Next character received before reading a character received by RS232C
similar to an external machine.
interface 1
FRAMING ERROR (RS232C1)

333 Stop bit of character received by RS232C interface 1 not detected
BAUD RATE must be small.
BUF OVERFLOW (RS232C1)

Other machine must be of the DC
334 Data exceeding 10 characters received after sending out stop code
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
(DC3) by RS232C interface 1
RX TIME OUT (RS232C2) Other machine must be of the DC

336 No data received within 5 seconds at RS232C interface 2 CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
OVERRUN ERROR (RS232C2)

337 Next character received before reading a character received by RS232C BAUD RATE must be small.
interface 2
FRAMING ERROR (RS232C2) Make BAUD RATE and STOP BIT

338 Stop bit of character received by RS232C interface 2 not detected similar to an external machine.
BUF OVERFLOW (RS232C2)

Other machine must be of the DC
339 Data exceeding 10 characters received after sending stop code (DC3)
CODE control (XON/XOFF) type.
by RS232C interface 2
CANNOT RESTART BEFORE RPR

Program restart being performed even though reference point return has
341 not been completed yet (this alarm will occur when a program
including G28 command is restarted after turning on power or after the
emergency stop switch is turned on and off)
1 -
3) Heat & Power alarm
THERMAL SENSOR ALARM

401 Thermal sensor on PCB detected to be higher than 70 centigrade Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
degrees
24V DOWN Check power voltage.

402 24V voltage of controller lower than the specified voltage Refer to page 4-5.
15V DOWN Check whether power voltage is 24V.

403 15V voltage of controller lower than the specified voltage Refer to page 4-5.
POWER MUST BE OFF Turn power off first and turn it on

420 Parameter requiring power turned off set again.
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
4) Over Travel Alarm
+OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) Press the cancel key and move it to

500 Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 1 while the direction.
moving in the plus direction Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) Press the cancel key and move it to

501 Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 1 while the + direction.
moving in the minus direction Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.
+OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2)
502 Tool penetrating the forbidden area of stored stroke limit 2 while
moving in the plus direction
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2)
moving in the minus direction
Refer to page 1-21 of this manual.

OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3)
moving in the plus direction
Only L line
-OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3)
moving in the minus direction
Only L line
+OVERTRABEL (HARD)
506 Plus stroke limit switch stepped on
-OVERTRABEL (HARD)
507 Minus stroke limit switch stepped on
If POSITION CODER is not used in

DISCONNECTION POS CODER
536 Spindle position coder detected to have been disconnected
MILLING, PARAMETER
5603 PDC=1.
1-
5) External I/O device alarm
SRCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED

550 Program number search or sequence number search request not
accepted (not in AUTO??? mode or in reset condition)
SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND

551 Program number specified by work number search not found
UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH)

552 Undefined address (high division) specified for high-order 4 bits
(EIA4~EIA7) of address signal at external data I/O interface
UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW)

553 Undefined address (low division) specified for low-order 4 bits
(EIA0~EIA3) of address signal at external data I/O interface
OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR

556 Output request made again during external data input/output, or output
request made to an address where no output data is present
SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND

558 Program number or sequence number specified by external data input
not found
DI. EIDHW OUT OF RANGE

559 Value entered by external data input signal EID32~EID47 exceeding
the allowable maximum value
DI. EIDLL OUT OF RANGE

560 Value entered by external data input signal EID0~EID31 exceeding the
allowable maximum value
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
6) Rigid tapping alarm
SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (STOP)

580 Spindle position deviation amount during stop exceeding the limit
value preset by parameter #5752
SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)

581 Spindle position deviation amount while moving exceeding the limit
value preset by parameter #5754
RIGID TAPPING MODE G42.2 OFF

582 When the G84 (G74)command is specified, RIGID MODE DI signal
not ON while M29 command has been issued
ILLEGAL USE M29 OR S

583 Command position??? of M29 or error in S
ILL MOVE COMMAND IN RIGID TAPPING

584 Axis movement specified between M29 and G84 (G74) commanded
blocks
1 -
7) Servo alarm
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (STOP)

Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-3
707 Position deviation amount during stop exceeding the value preset by
of this manual.
parameter #1804
This occurs in case of clashing or

loaded machine. The alarm is not
canceled even when power is turned
off and on again.
(How to cancel)
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
After setting 1823ADF1 0(only
Position deviation amount during stop exceeding the value preset by
708 parameter #1805
axis with ERROR)
1822DRIFT AMOUNT 0 (only
(PARA. NO. 1805)
axis with ERROR) the alarm is
canceled when power is turned off
and on again.
After cancellation, 1823 ADF 0 1
must be reset.
Readjust SERVO ZERO.

(ASIX NAME) DRIFT OVER For detailed information, refer to
709 Excessive drift compensation amount (more than 1632 VELO) Chapter 4 Setting and adjustment -- 5.
How to adjust SERVO (page 4-5).
(ASIX NAME) READY ON ERROR

712 Velocity control ready signal (VRDY) turned off while position control
of this manual.
ready signal (PRDY) is on
(ASIX NAME) READY ON ERROR

713 Velocity control ready signal (PRDY) turned on while position control
of this manual.
ready signal (PRDY) is off
(ASIX NAME) ENCODER DISCONNECT

714 Encoder detected to have been
of this manual.
disconnected
(ASIX NAME) EXCESS ERROR (SERVO OFF)

715 Position deviation amount at servo off exceeding the allowable
of this manual.
maximum value preset by parameter #1806
EMERGENCY BUTTON ON
724 Emergency stop applied
EMERGENCY L/S ON
725 Emergency limit switch turned on
EMERGENCY STOP BY PLC

726 Emergency stop applied by PLC
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2.2 ALARM LIST
(ASIX NAME) PULSE COUNT MISS (ENC) Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-8
730 Error detected in the pulse counting of the motor encoder of this manual.
(ASIX NAME) UNFIT ENCODER 1REV. ON (ENC)

One revolution signal of the motor encoder turned on at Refer to Chapter 2 SERVO page 2-9
732 an abnormal position of this manual.
(number of pulse per revolution is abnormal)
(ASIX NAME) AUTO GAIN OVER

734 Compensation amount exceeding the possible maximum compensation
of this manual.
amount in automatic gain compensation function
(ASIX NAME) NO F/B PULSE

735 No encoder feedback pulse
input/detected
(ASIX NAME) SERVO ALARM Check which number is indicated on

736 Alarm detected from the axis control servo unit the LED of the SERVO UNIT in the
(AC SERVO M SERIES) power cabinet behind the machine.
USER DATA ERROR, ABS ENCODER ERR

740 User data error occurred, or absolute encoder signal disconnected
741 OVER CURRENT
POWER LINE PHASE CUT

742 Power line phase cut, instant power failure error
743 ABNORMAL POWER F/B
ABNORMAL VOLTAGE
744 Abnormal main circuit voltage
OVER SPEED
745 Over speed, pressure detected
ENCODER disconnection
OVERLOAD
747 Overload, heat sink overheating
1 -
8) SYSTEM ALARM

COMMON MEMORY INITIAL CHECK ERROR WITH
9001
0xAA
COMMON MEMORY INITIAL CHECK ERROR WITH
9002
0x55
9003 INITIAL COMMUNICATION ERROR
9004 PARAMETER INITIAL TRANSLATION ERROR
9005 COMMON MEMORY INITIALIZE ERROR
9010 ZERO DIVIDE ERROR HOOK
9011 NMI HOOK
9012 INVALID OP CODE INTERRUPT HOOK
9013 CO_PROCESSOR ERROR HOOK
9014 GROUP A INTERRUPT HOOK
9015 GROUP B INTERRUPT HOOK
9016 GROUP C INTERRUPT HOOK Turn off power and
then turn it on
9050 INTERRUPT COUNTER CHECK ERROR again.
9051 BACKGROUND COUNTER CHECK ERROR
If the problem
9052 COMMUNICATION ERROR (MMI TIME OUT) persists, please
9053 COMMUNICATION ERROR (MMI UPDATE ERROR) contact us.
9054 AXIS CONTROLLER STATE ERROR
9055 NC NORMAL RESTART
9200 COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC TIME OUT)
9201 COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC UPDATE ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR
9202
(DIAGNOSIS DATA CHECK SUM ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR (UPDATE CHECK SUM
9203
ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR
9204
(NC MODIFICATION REQUEST ERROR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR (NC REFERENCE RETURN
9205
ERROR)
9206 NC RESET BY WATCH DOG TIMER
If an ALARM other than the examples above occurs, please contact us.
1 -
2. ALARM MESSAGE
2. 3 THERMAL ALARM
2.3 Details of the 401 THERMAL SENSOR ALARM

When the internal temperature of the SENTROL2 main unit exceeds 70, this alarm will be displayed.
(How to Release)
When the temperature drops to less than 70, the alarm will be automatically released.
Cause of Trouble Measures
Replace the fan (refer to page 5-

1 Trouble occurs in the cooling fan in the SENTROL2 main unit 2).
Trouble occurs in the cooling fan in machine power electric

2 Replace the fan.
cabinet (cabinet).
The air filter of the cooling fan in the machine power electric
3 Clean the air filter.
cabinet (cabinet) is clogged.
2.4 Details of the 500 ~ 505 STORED STROKE LIMIT ALARM
When the machine reaches the stored stroke limit, this message will be displayed.
In case of automatic mode when this alarm is displayed, all axes stop transport. For the manual mode, only
the alarmed axis stops transport.
(Cause)
(a) The program was modified.
(b) Set the stored stroke limit correctly.
(How to Release)
(a) The machine can be moved in the reverse direction of its previous moving direction.
(b) If you cannot leave the restricted area, press the Emergency Stop button to release the alarm and move the
machine to jog transport by entering G23 (STORED STROKE LIMIT FUNCTION OFF) with MDI.
1 -
2.5 Details of the 1000 ~ 2099 Sequence-related Alarms & Numberless Alarms
In an NC machine, various controls are needed according to the machine structure including moving an axis to a
certain position, controlling the spindle for cutting, etc., as well as rotating the spindle and supplying lubricants. This
alarm warns the operator of abnormalities related to machine operation.
In general, the details of the alarms and their numbers vary by machine due to the different structures of each
machine. For more information, refer to the user's manual or contact the machine maker. This section describes some
common release methods when an alarm occurs.
(How to Release)
When an alarm related to sequences 1000~2099 or a numberless alarm occurs, the operator should find out
where the alarm occurs first.
(a) Enter data in the order of DIAG PLC PLC DIAG Address Being Searched = A 0 . The following are
shown:
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A000 00000010 When A000~A024 are displayed, the alarm
A001 00000000 is generated in the case of "1." In this
A002 00000000 example, the alarm occurs at A000.1.
|
|
A006
Addresses being searched
PLC
(b) Afterward, when entering DIAG followed by data in the order of
LAD- Search SYMBOL/ADDRESS A
DER WRITE
0 . 1 , for example, data will
be displayed as follows:
where part is the conditional part and part is the result.

The cause of the alarm should be removed after reviewing part , because it is due to the part .
1 -
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions

3. Function and Operation of Alarm History
3.1 Functions
Up to 120 alarms generated in the past and 400 keys that have been entered are memorized..
The operation mode, the program number (automatic operation time), and the alarm number time (month,
day, hour, and minute) when an alarm occurs are memorized. The time (month, day, hour, and minute)
when the power is on is also memorized.
3.2 Displays
1) Select the Alarm menu in the Diagnosis.
DISPLAY
*
Position JOG/O.R Command Program OFFSET DIAG PARAM Alarm
instruction ETER
*
RUN Special PLC TIME
HOUR SET
*
)
* Twice
MISC RUN TIME ALRM

DATA HOUR SET
*
2) The operation mode, program number, alarm number, alarm description, time, and the order of
alarms when alarms occur are displayed.
1-
MDI DIAG Alarm Machine
NO ALARM MODE PROGRAM DATE TIME

1 0708 SVON 11/05 14:33
X EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
100
Fig. 1-1
No. KEY Selection PLC
Alarm display
3) Press the Selection key to display the P/S alarm (see page 1-3) and press the key again to display
the alarms other than the P/S alarm. When the alarm is P/S alarm, 20 is displayed at the right
bottom of the screen; when any alarm other than P/S alarm, 100 is displayed at the right bottom
of the screen. 20 and 100 mean the maximum amount of alarms that can be displayed,
respectively.
4) Pressing the KEY key will display the entered key and the power-on time as shown in Fig. 1-2.
The display appears in the time order of the alarm keys displayed. Also, KEY is displayed at the
right bottom of the screen.
MDI DIAG Alarm
NO ALARM MODE PROGRAM DATE TIME

POWER ON 12/19 11:30
F4, F9, F7, F0, F6,
1 0005 AUTO 12/11 11:05
KEY 20
Fig. 1-2
Alarms and
No. KEY Selection PLC
key display
5) The following screen appears by selecting the No. menu, and entering the alarm number for
which a user wants to search displays the alarm number from that designated number.
Alarm =
If there is no alarm that is searched for, the following message will be displayed:
None
6) Selecting the PLC menu will display the PLC screen.
1-
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
3.3 Symbols
1) Modes 2) Keys
Display Description Display Description
MPG MDI operation _ Space key

MDI MDI mode OPRT Operators panel key
JOG Manual operation ; END OF BLOCK
AUTO Automatic operation BS key
EDIT Editing Cancel Cancel key

REF Ref. point return RSET Reset key
Within 5 seconds after power
PWON STRT CYCLE START key
on
DNC DNC operation Stop FEED HOLD key
CRT DISP key
F1~F8 F1~F8 keys
MODE Select key
PWON Power ON
LF (ENTER) key
1-

4. NC Functions & Malfunction
1) Incapable of Operating with Manual Pulse Generator
Items Cause of Trouble How to Verify Measures
1. The machine does not work while the

current position display moves.
1 Trouble analysis To the item 2.
2. Neither the current position display nor
the machine does not move.
The machine lock

2 Confirm the operation panel. To the item 5.
MLK is on.
The servo off signal Verify the PLC diagnosis.

3
is on. Check the G64.6, G84.6, and G74.6.
Abnormality of servo
4
system
ITX G64.4
5 Interlock signal Check the ITX, ITY, and ITZ. ITY G74.4
ITZ G84.4
The mode signal is Verify if the handle is marked on the

6 PLC diagnosis, F3.1
not entered yet. status indication of the screen.
The direction signal
Make sure the axis selecting signal is entered
7 of feed axis is not
in the handle screen.
entered yet.
Inferior manual pulse Check if the contents of the MPA and MPB
8 generator (MPG) (page 11/11 No.18) in the diagnosis (general)
Inferior cables screen change.
Turn the power off and

The red LED on the turn on again. When the
9 printed board lights trouble frequently
up. occurs, do not hesitate
to contact us.
1-
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
2) Incapable of Synchronized Feed (Thread Cutting) Operation
Confirm the number

Verify the trouble by viewing the feed rate
1 of spindle
screen.
revolutions.
Cable connection Confirm the connection between the NC and

2
error the position coder.
Verify if the contents of the spindle position

Inferior position Replace the position
3 coder (page 10/11 No.15) in the diagnosis
coder coder.
(general) vary.
When the zero signal of the position coder is

incoming, verify if the position at that time is
Inferior position Check the position coder
4 same as that after high-speed rotation of the
coder rotation timing belt, etc.
spindle chuck. (Is the general diagnosis page
11/11 No.20 PCZ 1?)
1-
3) Incapable of Automatic Operation
Try to turn the start-up button on/off in auto

mode.
1 Trouble analysis 1. The STL lamp does not light up. To the item 2.
2. The spindle does not work while the STL

To the item 7.
lamp lights up.
The mode signal Confirm if the Automation mark is

2
cannot be input. displayed in the screen status indication.
The start signal was Check the ST signal (G5.0) in the PLC
3
not input. diagnosis.
Quiescence signal of
Check the *SP signal (G5.0) in the PLC
4 automatic operation
diagnosis.
(*SP)
The reset signal was
5
input.
1. The override is
0%.
2. The start lock and
the interlock are
on. Check the speed screen.
3. Perform the
inposition check. In the case of 0.0 bit INP=0
6 4. Wait for spindle
rotation by means Check it out in the spindle speed screen.
of feed per
revolution F44.7
5. Wait for signal
indicating arrival
at the spindle
speed
1-
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
4) Wrong Location of Ref. Point Return
Deviated by 1 grid.
The distance from the

After moving the machine from the reference departure point of the
point position to the deceleration DOG direction, deceleration DOG to
The position of the observe the deceleration signal using the the reference point
1 deceleration DOG is diagnosis function to read the reference point position shall be
not good. position and the deceleration DOG position, and equal to
the distance between the two positions, at the approximately 1/2
NC position. revolution of the
motor.
Refer to the
The length of the combination manual
Read the length of the deceleration DOG as set
2 deceleration DOG is to change the length
forth in the above item 1.
short. of the DOG as
needed.
The stop position was irregularly deviated.
Make sure the cable shield is grounded and a Earth the cable
spark killer is mounted to the solenoid coil. shield.
1 Noise
Also, make sure the encoder cable is separated Install a spark killer.
from the cabinet cables. Remove the cable.
The power supply

Make sure the power supply voltage of the Add the power cable
2 voltage of the
encoder is 4.75V or higher. of (5V)/0V.
encoder is low.
The connection
between the servo
Check the machine position and the match by Firmly tighten the
3 motor and the
attaching marks to the motor axis. coupling.
mechanical coupling
is loose.
4 Inferior encoder Replace the encoder. Replace the encoder.
Replace the EPS3

5 Inferior EPS3 board Replace the printed board.
board.
1-
<How to Adjust the Location of Ref. Point Return>
1) Overview
During ref. point return, the relationship between the deceleration DOG and the location of ref. point
return is critical.
If the ref. point return is incorrectly done, the stop position will be deviated by one revolution of the
motor and it will be impossible to return to the origin exactly. In this section, we will review how to
setup the DOG or parameters exactly.
2) How to Confirm the Reference Point Position

For example, the following is how to check the X axis (PARAMETER 1823 DIA=0):
A) Select the X axis in handle mode at the reference point position, press the relative value X0, and
then transport the handle in the negative () direction until the diagnosis No. 0000 7BIT DEC
becomes 0.
B) When DEC becomes 1 by transporting the handle in the positive (+) direction gradually after
performing A), check the relative value of the X axis at that position. Optionally, put the value
as A (mm).
C) If A (mm) is nearly 0 or same as one revolution of the motor, there must be a problem.
Deceleration
DOG a
Reference Position
3) Two Methods of Adjusting Zero Position
A) Move the deceleration DOG to make A approximately a half of the transport distance per one
revolution of the motor (mm).
B) Increase or decrease the value of the reference point shift parameter, and adjust it to
approximately a half of the transport distance per one revolution of the motor (mm). The
reference point position varies depending on the setting value of the parameter. (For more
details, refer to 5) How to Shift the Reference Point Position.)
1-
3. ALARM HISTORY
3.1 Functions
Motor speed
Deceleration
DOG
DEC
Diagnosis
00000000
When the reference

Encoder Z
ENZ point shift is 0
Diagnosis Stop position of

Designated
0006 mechanical
origin
Stop position of the

machine
Shift of the
deceleration DOG
position
Correspondence of the set mechanical origin

and the stop position of actual machine
Fig. 1-3 Timing chart of ref. point return
1-
4) Operation Sequence of Ref. Point Return
The ref. point return of the SENTROL2 is the grid shift type.
In the case of the parameter No. 1823 DIA=0, ENCODER PULSE 6000PPR, and 10 mm pitch per
revolution:
A) When the parameter No. 1801 RAC of the ref. point return signal becomes 1, the spindle turns
towards the rapid G00 speed in the origin direction.
B) The spindle begins to decelerate when the deceleration DOG is on, and it moves at full speed after
the acceleration is finished.
C) If the reference point shift is 0 and the deceleration DOG is off, the spindle stops when the ENZ
becomes 1.
5) How to Shift the Reference Point Position
A) When attempting to adjust the origin point at the designated origin as shown in Fig. 1-3 , use the
parameter No. 1810 (RP. SHIFT AMOUNT).
In the case of , the setting value of the parameter should be calculated by the unit of pulse because
the distance to the designated origin is 4300 (operated by the MPG handle).
6000 4 (PULSE)
RP.SHIFT AMOUNT(PULSE) = 4300 ()
10000 ()
= 10320
B) When performing ref. point return as it is, the ENZ is grid-shifted as shown in Fig. 1-3 , making
the spindle stop at the position of -5700, which is different from the targeted value. That is because
the deceleration DOG was off at that position in advance.
C) Thus, move the deceleration DOG to the right as sh0wn in Fig. 1-3 , in order to match the
designated origin with the machine stop position, as shown in Fig. 1-3 .
D) At this moment, the distance between and should be equal to approximately a half revolution
of the motor. When the positions of and are approached each other, there must be an error of
the reference point position as much as one revolution of the motor.
Note) When giving a diameter instruction to the X axis at an NC lathe (SENTROL2-L), the value
displayed on the screen (1823, DIA=1) becomes twice as long as the actual distance of the
machine movement. Thus, set the DIA of the parameter No. 1823 to 0 only when it is
necessary, and be sure to return the value to 1 after the adjustment.
1-
5. Abnormalities on Screen
5.1 Screen Inactivated when..

5.1 Screen Inactivated When Turning Power Switch On : Present state
Verify the displayed contents of the LED indicating the : Cause

status of the main unit. (Refer to page 5-2.)
Screen inactivated when

turning the power switch on.
Status displayed one minute later The LED does Status displayed one minute later after
after power on. LED indicates 0. not light up. power on. LED indicates 1 ~ 9.
+12V LED of the +12V LED of the The color of the The color of the screen is
main unit lights main unit does screen seems slightly continuously dark after
up. not light up. brighter 3 to 4 power on.
seconds later after
12V AVR in
CPU card is
main unit is
inferior.
inferior.
LCD panel is Cable connection is
inferior. improper.
DKU RGB unit ~
LCD panel
RGB UNT is See page 5-5.
inferior.
See page 5-5.
+12V LED and - All LEDs in the
12V LED of the main unit do
main unit do not not light up. CABLE
light up. The fan in the CONNECTION IS +12V LED of +12V LED of
main unit does IMPROPER.
not make any MAIN UNIT
sound. ~DKU RGB UNIT
(CABLE CND1)
12V AVR in the See page 5-5.
main unit is Unable to
inferior. turn on the Back light is Cable connection
power. inferior. is improper.
Main unit ~ DKU
Back light power unit
inverter is (CABLE ACOUT)
See page 1-35 See page 5-5.
inferior.
RGB unit is DKU power unit

Note) DKU: Display Keyboard Unit inferior. is inferior.
See page 5-5. See page 5-5.
1-
5.2 Screen Disappears : Present state
Screen disappears : Cause

during NC operation.

Cable connection is Cable RGB unit is Static

improper. connection is inferior. Noise problem electricity
Main unit ~ DKU improper. See page 5-5. problem
RGB unit DKU RGB unit ~
(CABLE CND1) LCD panel
See page 5-5.
Noise counterplan Static electricity
Cable CND1 counterplan
Main unit ~ DKU RGB unit
1. Attach ferrite cores at the both ends 1 For a spindle running saw
of the cable. (woodworking machine)
MAKER: TDK ZCAT2132-1130-M
2. Connect shields to the metal part of
the connector at the both ends of Broaden the gap between the
the cable. DKU (display keyboard unit)
3. Change the connector case at the and PVC hose (sawdust
DKU side of the cable to anti-noise collector).
type (silver color).
Noises of the inverter motor

1. Lengthen the
acceleration /
deceleration times.
2. Disconnect the motor
power cables from other
wirings.
Relay
1. Attach diodes to the relay coil that
switches between on and off at high
5.3 Stripes on the Screen
Stripes on the screen
Cable connection is RGB unit is

LCD panel is
improper. inferior.
inferior.
DKU RGB unit ~ See page 5-5.
LCD panel
See page 5-5.
Note) DKU: Display Keyboard Unit
1-
5.1 Screen Inactivated when..
6. Power ON Malfunction
: Present state : Cause
The LED in the main unit does not

Una light up when pressing down the
power ON switch.
After unplugging the

CNACIN connector in
the main unit, make
sure AC220V is supplied
properly.
AC220V is AC220V is
supplied. not being
supplied.
+5V LED in the +12V and -12V LED +24V LED in the
All LEDs in the main
main unit does in the main unit do main unit does not
unit do not light up.
not light up. not light up. light up.
5V AVR in 12V AVR in 24V AVR in

the main unit the main unit the main unit
is inferior. is inferior. is inferior.
PSP7 board
is inferior.
Disconnection
of fuse in the
main unit
F1, F2
Power On/Off
switch is inferior.
1-
7. Communication Troubles
Present state: In spite of trying to enter the program in edit mode from an external device, the
length of entered tape is not displayed while the message being entered is
flickering on the screen.
The operator tried to operate the DNC, but the number indicating the length of
entered tape remains as 0.00 m and does not change, while the message
being entered is flickering on the screen.
In spite of trying to output the program in edit mode from an external device, it
is impossible to input the program into the PC, while the message being
output and the length of the tape are displayed on the NC screen.
1 Improper cable Check the cable wiring.

wiring
Make adjustment between the Refer to Appendix

2 Parameter setting 14 of this manual
communication device and the parameters
error (pages 9-19).
of the SENTROL2.
1) Is there the % signal at the head of the

program? Refer to Appendix
No % signal at
3 2) Is the software one to whose head the % 14 of this manual
the head of the
signal is attached during communication, (pages 9-18).
program.
even when the signal does not exist at
the head of the program?
Check the connector voltage of the
SENTROL2 side
(25PIN connector
/9PIN connector) (Normal voltage)
SD (2PIN/3PIN) Possibility of IC
- 8 ~ - 12V trouble when the
SG (7PIN/5PIN) voltage is not
normal.
RD (3PIN/2PIN)
Telecommunicatio (Needs to replace
4 0V ~ 0.5V
n ICs in trouble the CPU card.)
SG (7PIN/5PIN)
RS (4PIN/7PIN)
- 8 ~ - 12V
SG (7PIN/5PIN) Please contact us.
CS (5PIN/8PIN)
0V ~ 0.5V
SG (7PIN/5PIN)

1-
1.Servo-related nc alarm
(1)Display Format of Alarm
Chapter 2 Servo
1.Servo-related NC Alarms (Details)
(1) Display Format of Alarms
0120 X RPR ERROR
Alarm No. Alarm message
Designation of the axis where an alarm occurs
The designation of an axis can be configured by the parameter 1020 NAME OF EACH
AXIS. However, the setting range is marked as for the axis designation in the 65 ~
90 (A ~ Z) manual.
2-
Chapter 2 SERVO
0120 RPR ERROR
When one revolution signal (ENZ) has been never detected for the deceleration
switch (diagnosis No.0000 DEC) from ON to OFF during returning to the
origin (for diagnosis No.0000 RAC = 1), this alarm will be displayed.
DEC
OFF ON OFF
Speed
Detection delay
Approx. 30msec
FL
ENZ
This alarm will occur when ENZ is not

detected during this period.

When an alarm occurs at the rapid
traverse rate, RT0 Reduce the speed.
1 Too high speed When the ref. point return is done Lengthen the
at RT1 and RT2 to result in a deceleration DOG.
normal status
Execute the return at
the position away
Location of Check the distance between the
more than the
2 return start is location of return start and the
distance as long as 2
too close. origin.
revolutions of the
motor from the origin.
Have the sum of the
The power
voltage drop
supply voltage of The voltage of the pulse coder
3 introduced by the
pulse coder is should be 4.75V or higher.
cable less than 0.2V
too low.
for both 5V and 0V
Pulse coder
4 Replace the pulse coder. Replace
inferiority
Inferiority of
5 Replace the EPS3 board. Replace
EPS3 board
2-
NO.0709 DRIFT OVER
ENZ is found at the diagnosis 0006 ENZ.

When using a linear scale, the origin signal should be adjusted so that it can be
detected for the deceleration switch from ON to OFF. The origin signal of the linear
scale can be seen at the diagnosis 0006 ENZ.
It is possible to see if a one revolution signal and origin signal of the linear scale are
entered via the diagnosis 0005 ENCODER CTR SKIP. That is because the latched
value of the position counter by the signal is displayed. The time when the display is
changed is when the signal is input.
To release the alarm, switch on the reset key.
0707 EXCESS ERROR (STOP)
Position variation amount upon stop was too large.

Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon stop (diagnosis
0002 POSITION ERR) and the parameter 1804 STOP POS ERR LIMIT, when
the position variation amount exceeds the set value, the alarm occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off. However, the
parameter 1823 ERC = 1 or the position variation amount should be lower
than the set value.
Setting error of Make sure the content of the parameter Set the
1 position 1804 accords with the parameter table parameter
variation amount attached to the NC. correctly.
If the current needed to accelerate or

Lengthen the
decelerate the motor at the acceleration
time constant of
2 Undershoot or deceleration time of the NC does not
NC acceleration
flow, the amount of position control
or deceleration.
circuit errors is temporarily increased.
Abnormal power Put any inferior

3 Verify the voltage of control part.
supply voltage parts in order.
Check the connections including the
encoder cord, motor power cord, etc.
Especially, check if there is any bad
contact of the encoder signal lines or the Put any inferior
4 Poor connection
signal lines on A and B are not reversely parts in order.
connected. (Check the attachment
direction for encoder separately
mounted.
Troubles of EPS3
board and servo
Replace a spare printed board if available
AMP printed Replace the
5 to verify. At this time, make sure to
board, the printed board.
adjust and set anything correctly.
position control
parts
2-
Chapter 2 SERVO
0708 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)
Position variation amount upon movement was too large.

Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon movement
(diagnosis 0002 POSITION ERR) and the parameter 1805 MOVING POS ERR
LIMIT, when the position variation amount exceeds the set value, the alarm
occurs.
than the set value.
Setting error of Make sure the content of the

Set the parameter
1 position variation parameter 1805 accords with the
correctly.
amount parameter table attached to the NC.
If the current needed to accelerate or

Lengthen the time
decelerate the motor at the
constant of NC
acceleration or deceleration time of the
2 Overshoot acceleration or
NC does not flow, the amount of
deceleration (set at
position control circuit errors is
the control part).
temporarily increased.
Abnormal power Put any inferior
3 Verify the voltage of control part.
supply voltage parts in order.
Check the connections including the Put any inferior

4 Poor connection
encoder cord, motor power cord, etc. parts in order.
Troubles of EPS3
board and servo Replace a spare printed board if
AMP printed available to verify. At this time, make Replace the
5
board, the sure to adjust and set anything printed board.
position control correctly.
parts
2-
NO.0709 DRIFT OVER
0709 DRIFT OVER
When the amount of drift compensation (parameter 1822) or the value of the
diagnosis 0013 DRIFT for automatic drift compensation (parameter 1823
ADF = 1) is more than 1632, the alarm occurs.
To release this alarm, turn the emergency stop switch on or off.
Bad servo Make sure the servo adjustment has Adjust the servo
1
adjustment been properly performed. correctly.
Conflict between Turn off the power,

2 Verify via the alarm history, etc.
machines and then turn on.
Drift accumulated
3 Uptime of machines, etc. Readjust the servo.
for a long time
Replace the servo
4 Bad servo unit
unit.
Inferior EPS3 Replace the EPS3
5
printed board board.
2-
Chapter 2 SERVO
0712 READY OFF ERROR
The V-READY is still off (diagnosis 0007 bit2=1) even though the P-READY
(diagnosis 0007 PRD) is on.
Turn on the reset key to release the alarm after eliminating the cause.
If the parameter 1815 VOC = 1, the alarm is cancelled.
Make sure that the magnet contactor

AC 220V power Eliminate a root
and the relay for the servo unit are
supply failure or cause including
1 ON, and then measure the voltages
undervoltage to connection error,
between R, S, and T and between r
the servo unit. etc.
and t of the servo unit.
Power supply
failure or
Eliminate a root
undervoltage to
cause including
2 the coils of the
Make sure that the magnet contactor connection error,
magnet contactor
and the relay for the servo unit are not etc.
and relay for the
servo unit. ON, and then check the coil voltage.
Inferior magnet Replace the

3 contactor and magnet contactor
relay and the relay
Problems on the Eliminate a root
4 Check the sequences
sequences cause.
The servo unit is Replace the servo
5
inferior. unit.
The EPS3 board Replace the EPS3
6
is inferior. board.
2-
NO.0713 READY ON
0713 READY ON ERROR
V-READY is still ON (diagnosis 0007 bit2 = 1) even though the P-READY is

OFF (diagnosis 0007 PRD).
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON by eliminating the cause.
When the parameter 1815 VOC = 1, the alarm will be cancelled.
This alarm rarely occurs; however if it is the case, the cause may be the
troubles of the magnet contactor or the relay.
0714 ENCODER DISCONNECT
Disconnection of the encoder signal, phase A and phase B, and the ZERO
signal line
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON by eliminating the cause.
The encoder signal can be seen in a general diagnosis.
Diagnosis No. 0006 ENA: Phase A signal

ENB: Phase B signal
ENZ: ZERO signal 1: ON
Correct the cable

Improper cable Verify the connection and wiring of
1 connection and
connection the encoder return cables.
wiring.
Inferior EPS3 Replace the EPS3

2
board board.
Inferior encoder
Replace the motor
3 of the servo
or the encoder.
motor
2-
Chapter 2 SERVO
0715 EXCESS ERROR (SERVO OFF)
Position variation amount upon servo off was too large.

Comparing the values of the position variation amount upon servo off
(diagnosis 0007 PRD = 1, EBL = 0) and the parameter 1806 SERVO OFF
POS ERR LIMIT, when the position variation amount exceeds the set value,
the alarm occurs.
than the set value.
The alarm can be cancelled by setting the parameter to 1815 SOC = 1.
The cause of this alarm is a big movement of the spindle by an external

force or collision in servo off condition.
0730 PULSE COUNT MISS (ENC)
A count error occurred at the counter for position feedback of the encoder.
The amount of count error is displayed on the diagnosis 0012 PULSE COUNT
MISS.
The alarm check function will be in effect after the completion of ref. point
return. The alarm check is overridden by setting the parameter to 1815 F1C =
1.
To release the alarm, make the reset key ON.
Is the parameter No. 1824 zero pulse

Parameter setting
1 with a correct value? Reset
error
(Yaskawa servo: Standard 4)
The encoder of the

Replace the motor
2 servo motor is
or encoder.
inferior.
Count error by Verify the earth cable of the motor, Eliminate a root
3
noise the shield of the encoder cable, etc. cause.
2-
NO.0732 UNFIT ENC
0732 UNFIT ENCODER 1REV. ON (ENC)
The number of generated pulses per revolution of the encoder 1 is incorrect.

The number that is determined as abnormal will be displayed on the diagnosis
0013 ENC 1REV PULSE. The display will not disappear until the reset key is
on.
When the parameter is set to 1815 F1C = 1, this function will be cancelled.
Is the parameter No. 1801 encoder type

Parameter
1 a correct value? Reset
setting error
(Yaskawa servo: Standard 4)
The encoder of
Replace the motor
2 the servo motor
or encoder.
is inferior.
Count error by Verify the earth cable of the motor, the Eliminate a root
3
noise shield of the encoder cable, etc. cause.
0734 AUTO GAIN OVER
The amount of automatic gain compensation was too large. To release the
alarm, make the reset key ON.
Cause of
Items How to Verify Measures
Trouble
Servo Make the
Was the servo adjusted in a proper
1 adjustment is adjustment of the
way?
bad. servo.
Servo unit is Replace the servo
2
inferior. unit.
EPS3 board is Replace the EPS3
3
inferior. board.
0736 SERVO ALARM
Check to see which number is displayed on the LED of the servo unit.
Refer to the subsequent pages of this manual to verify alarms and take
appropriate measures.
2-
1.How to Troubleshoot
1.1 Checkpoint for Troubles
Chapter 3 Spindle
1. How to Troubleshoot
1.1 Checkpoints for Troubles
When any troubles occur in the control unit, check the following items first:
Verify which alarm is indicated by the controller alarm. Also, check the past
alarms in alarm mode of the indicator.
For fusing, which phase is it out of R, S, or T phase?
(Control circuit input FUSE F1, F2, F3)
Is there any possibility for reoccurrence of breakdown or abnormality?
Are the ambient temperature and the temperature in the power electric
cabinet normal?
Accelerating or decelerating? Or is the machine being driven at normal speed?
What about the speed at that moment?
Is there any difference between forward rotation and reverse rotation?
Has been there any instantaneous electricity failure?
Does the trouble occur during a certain operation or instruction?
How often the trouble occurs?
Does this trouble occur when the load is weighted or reduced?
Have you ever tried to replace the troubled parts or take an appropriate
emergency measure?
How many years have passed since beginning the operation?
Is the power supply voltage normal? Or is it changed largely according to
time?
1.2 Step 1
Check the following items as the first step of troubleshooting:
(1) Power supply voltage: 200V + 10% -15%, 50/60Hz, 210V, 220V +10% -15%,
60Hz.
Especially, make sure not to lower the power supply voltage below 200V 15%
for just a moment.
Ex) The voltage drops at a certain time every day.

The voltage drops when a certain machine is being operated.
3-
Chapter 3 SPINDLE
(2) Is the control function around the controller normal?
Ex) Are the NC and the sequence circuit normal?

Is there any abnormalities in the parts, wirings, etc. by examining with the
unaided eye?
(3) Is the ambient temperature of the controller (in-plate temperature) 55 or less?
(4) Is there any abnormality in the external appearance of the controller?
Ex) Damage by a fire or abnormality of card parts and pattern

Loose wiring, damages, intermixture of foreign substances, etc.
(5) Are all of the DC power supply outputs of SF-PW rated voltage?
When verifying the conditions described above enough, it is possible to

determine how much abnormalities have occurred in which parts.
The following shows a rough classification of the troubles of FR-SF:
z The controller does not work normally even when providing the
Fixed power supply to the controller for the first time. ()
classification z The operation was suddenly stopped although it has shown normal
A status until now. ()
z Sometimes it does not work normally. The stop position of the orient
is deviated.
An alarm is displayed. ()
z Controller trouble Abnormality in the main circuitry

Abnormality in the control circuit
z Abnormality in detector Abnormality in the encoder for detecting
speed
Fixed Abnormality in the encoder for multipoint
classification orient
B 1 Abnormality in the magnet sensor for
point orient
z Abnormality in the parameters from the NC and transferred data
z Abnormality in the power supply
z Abnormality in the motor
z Other abnormalities (Shortage of input signal conditions, cable
disconnection, etc.
3-
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing nc
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing NC
When mounting an NC, perform inspection and adjustment according to the following
procedures. For more information, refer to the remarks in the table below:
No. Description Remarks
1 Inspect the appearance of the NC main unit, DKU, and servo unit. Refer to (1).
2 Make sure the terminal fixed by screws is completely connected. Refer to (2).
3 Connect external cables. Refer to (3).

With turning the power supply for NC off, connect the power
4 Refer to (4).
supply input cable.
5 Make sure the connection position of the connector is correct. Refer to (5).
6 Verify the settings. Refer to (6).
7 Verify the input power supply voltage and frequency. Refer to (7).
8 Check to see if the output voltage is short with the earth. Refer to (8).
9 Supply the power to the system and check the output voltage. Refer to (9).
10 Verify the interface signal between the NC and the machine. Refer to (10).
11 Verify various parameters and setting data. Refer to (11).
12 Turn the power off. Refer to (12).
13 Connect the motor power cable. Refer to (13).
14 Turn the power on. Refer to (14).

Examine the movement of each spindle by means of manual
15 Refer to (15).
transport.
16 Adjust the servo system. Refer to (16).
17 Make sure all of the NC functions work normally. Refer to (17).
4-
(1) Inspect the appearances of the NC main unit, DKU, and servo unit.
Whether there is any dirt or damage on the manual operators panel within the
operators panel box;
Whether the attachment of the printed board, the servo unit, etc. in the power
electric cabinet is loose or missed; and
Whether the cables in the power electric cabinet are damaged (e.g., wire coat
peeled off)
(2) Make sure the terminal fixed by screws is completely connected.
Terminal block of transformer (primary and secondary sides)
Inspect the status of attachment and damage for the cover part (acryl plate) of
each terminal block.
(3) Connect external cables.

Make sure that:
A protective earth cable with enough thickness not less than 14 between the
NC and the power electric cabinet of the machine side is connected;
The protective earth is a single point earth type which is connected from the
power electric cabinet of the machine side to the grounding;
All of the signal cables are collectively shielded; and
The cable specification complies to the applied manuals for:
the motor signals; the motor power; the servo unit interface;
the position coder; the spindle analog output; the manual pulse generator;
the DKU; the RS232C interface; and the PLC DI/DO
(4) With the NC power supply off, connect the power input cable.
On this occasion, make sure to unplug the motor power cord.
(5) Make sure the connection positions of the connectors are correct:
Whether the Dsub connector is fixed using clamping screws, and
Whether the MOLEX connectors (CNACIN, CNACOUT) are firmly fixed.
(6) Verify the settings.
Setting up the power supply transformer terminal
Setting up the AC servo unit on the printed board
Setting up the AC spindle servo unit on the printed board
4-
1. Inspection & Adjustment When Installing nc
(7) Verify the input power supply voltage and frequency.
Make sure the input power supply voltage meets the following specification:
AC 220V 10% 50/60Hz Hz 1
Make sure the capacity of the input power supply for the power consumption of
the NC main unit and the servo unit is sufficient.
(8) Make sure the output voltage is not short with the earth.
Make sure each output voltage of the power supply unit is not short with 0V:
5V and 0V 24V and 0V 12V and 0V
12V and 0V
(9) Verify the output voltage after supplying power.
Make sure each power supply output at the corresponding check pin of the DIO3
board falls within the range described in the table below:
Designation
Rated Allowable
of voltage Measuring location
voltage voltage range
output
The P5V check pin of the DIO3
P5V 5V 5.0~5.1V
board and screws of the main unit
P12V 12V 12.0~12.5V
The N12V check pin of the DIO3
N12V 12V 12.0~12.5V
(10) Verify the interface signals between the NC and the machine side.
Refer to the summary table of diagnosis functions.
(11) Verify various parameters and setting data.
Refer to the parameter summary table.
(12) Turn the power off.
(13) Connect the motor power cord.
4-
(14) Turn the power on.
In the case of alarm occurred, handle the alarm according to the alarm summary
table.
After repeating power on/off and emergency stop function several times, make
sure the motor does not rotate.
(15) Examine the movement of each spindle by manual transport.
Move the spindle 10 by 10 by means of manual pulse transport or

incremental transport. At this moment, verify if the machine moves accurately.
Verify if the machine stops accurately when detecting the emergency L/S on
alarm by moving to low override in manual jog transport and intentionally
operating the limit switch installed to the machine.
Make sure alarms indicating excessive error even at the highest transport speed
appear, by means of varying and moving the manual jog transport and manual
transport override.
(16) Check the servo system.
While automatically operating a simple program, verify if the value of the position
loop gain displayed in the general diagnosis (diagnosis number 014) falls within
0.5% of the set value (parameter No.1803).
(17) Verify if all of the NC functions are normally operated.
Perform ref. point return.
Set the amount of grid shift. It will be in effect only when turning the power off
once after the setting and turning the power on again.
Conduct continuous operation test according to the test program suitable for the
machine.
4-
2. Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage
2.1 Validation of Input Voltage
2. Validation & Adjustment of Power Supply Voltage
2.1 Validation of Input Voltage
Verify if the input voltage meets the specification below.

(Check the voltage between the CNACIN pin 1 and pin 3 of the main unit connector.)
AC 220V 10 % 50/60Hz 1 % 1
2.2 Fuse
There exist three fuses in the SENTROL2 main unit.
F1, F2 Fuses for AC220V power supply input (DAITO HP50 AC250V 5A)
F3 Fuse for +24V power supply (DAITO MP20 2A)
Check the condition of the above fuses and replace any that is short.
Be sure to replace an equivalent fuse.
How to determine whether a fuse is short
Space is seen. A white mark is seen.
Normal Short
2.3 Validation of DC Voltage
The followings show how to measure the DC power supply voltage in the SENTROL2 main
unit:
Designation
Rated Allowable
of voltage Measuring location
voltage voltage range
output
P5V 5V 5.0~5.1V board and screws of the main
unit
P12V 12V 12.0~12.5V board and screws of the main
unit
The N12V check pin of the DIO3
N12V 12V 12.0~12.5V board and screws of the main
unit
The No. 15 pin of the CNA1
P24V 24V 23.5~25.5V connector on the EPS3 board
and screws of the main unit
4-
Measuring points for DC power supply voltage
No. 15 pin (+24V)
+5V check pin

Fuses Screw of the main unit +12V check pin
-12V check pin
3. Volume of Each Printed Board
3.1 Overview of Volume Deployment of SENTROL2
The SENTROL2 has volumes as follows:
Board name Volume name Function of volume

Set the voltage at which an alarm
BKP4 VR2 occurs when the power supply voltage
drops.
EPS3 VR1 D/A output offset (common in 4 axes)
RIO1 VR1 Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
RIO2 VR1 Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
VR1 A/D 0V adjust
RAD1 VR2 A/D gain
VR3 Set the power supply voltage (+5V)
Adjusting after shipping is prohibited since the factory-settings are

appropriately fixed when shipping.
4-
4. How to Adjust Screen
4. 1 TFT LCD
4. How to Adjust Screen
4.1 TFT LCD
A. Location of Screen Adjustment Switches
KEY SCAN BOARD
M4 THREAD POWER UNIT
Rear panel of DKU (Display/Keyboard Unit)
B. Functions of Screen Adjustment Switches
Switch
Functions of switch
name
Button to show the screen adjustment menu
MENU
on the screen
Button to select a menu and move to the
SELECT previous screen
(Automatic screen adjustment)
Button to move downwards
DOWN
Decrease the adjustment value.
Button to move upwards
UP
Increase the adjustment value.
POWER Power (screen) ON/OFF button
C. Shortcut Button
Automatic screen
DOWN button
adjustment
Pressing the DOWN button once will adjust the screen indication
location automatically.
4-
5. How to Adjust Servo
5.1 Parameter Setting
A) Parameter Setting
Refer to the following table to set the maintenance parameters of the SENTROL2 setup screen and
the servo unit:
Example of Setting Parameters
YASKAWA SIGMA LG FDA-5000

Rated RPM 1000 rpm 1500 rpm 3000 rpm 1000 rpm 2000 rpm 3000 rpm
Maximum RPM 2000 rpm 3000 rpm 4500 rpm 2000 rpm 3000 rpm 5000 rpm
NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803
SENTROL2 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
parameters NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807
5000 (mV) 3334 (mV) 2223 (mV) 5000 (mV) 3334 (mV) 2000 (mV)
Servo unit CN-03 CN-03 CN-03 P3-13 P3-13 P3-13
parameters 200 (rpm) 300 (rpm) 450 (rpm) 2000(rpm) 3000(rpm) 5000(rpm)
PANASONIC MINAS MITSUBISHI MR-J2

Rated RPM 1000 rpm 2000 rpm 3000 rpm 2000 rpm 3000 rpm 3000 rpm
Maximum RPM 2000 rpm 3000 rpm 5000 rpm 3000 rpm 4000 rpm 4500 rpm
NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803
SENTROL2 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
parameters NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807
5000 (mV) 3334 (mV) 2000 (mV) 3334 (mV) 2500 (mV) 2223 (mV)
Servo unit Pr-50 Pr-50 Pr-50 P-25 P-25 P-25
parameters 200 (rpm) 300 (rpm) 500 (rpm) 3000(rpm) 4000(rpm) 4500(rpm)
DAEWOO AC SERVO
Rated RPM 1000 rpm 1500 rpm 3000 rpm
Maximum RPM 2000 rpm 2500 rpm 4500 rpm
NO.1803 NO.1803 NO.1803
SENTROL2 3000 3000 3000
parameters NO.1807 NO.1807 NO.1807
5000 (mV) 4000 (mV) 2223 (mV)
Servo unit P-28 P-28 P-28
parameters 3750 (x2 mV) 3000 (x2 mV) 1667 (x2 mV)
For more details, refer to pages 7-16 and 17 of this manual and the servo unit manual.
4-
5.How to Adjust Servo
5.2 ,Zero Setting
5.2 Zero Setting
A) Release of Automatic Drift Compensation Function
Set the maintenance parameters of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:

7 bits of NO.1823 ADF
X: 1 0
Y: 1 0
Z: 1 0
NO.1822 DRIFT AMOUNT

X: * 0
Y: * 0
Z: * 0
B) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
C) Zero Setting of the X-, Y-, and Z-axis Servo

1) Adjust the parameters of the X-axis servo unit so that the position error [pulse] of the general
diagnosis No. 0002 X axis of the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen may become 0.
YASKAWA LG PANASONIC MITSUBISHI DAEWOO

SIGMA FDA-5000 MINAS MR-J2 AC SERVO
CN00
Parameters 00-03 P3-14 Pr52 P-29 P-09
A-
2) Likewise 1), adjust the parameters of the Y-axis servo unit while observing the No.0002 Y-axis
value.
3) Likewise 1), adjust the parameters of the Z-axis servo unit while observing the No.0002 Z-axis
value.
D) Activating the Automatic Drift Compensation Function

Set the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:
7 bits of NO.1823 ADF
X: 0 1
Y: 0 1
Z: 0 1
E) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
F) Verifying the Zero Setting

Make sure the position error [pulse] of the general diagnosis No. 0002 X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the
diagnosis screen is nearly 0, and the drifts of the NO.0010 X-, Y-, and Z-axis falls within the
range of -5 ~ +5.
4-
5.3 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain
A) Release of Automatic Position Loop Gain Compensation
Change the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:

5 bits of NO.1823 AUG
X: 1 0
Y: 1 0
Z: 1 0
B) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
C) Position Loop Gain Setting of X-, Y-, and Z-axis Servo

1) Adjust the No. 1807 gain constant of the X-axis servo unit parameters and the SENTROL2
maintenance parameters so that, when moving the X axis up to 2000 to 3000 mm/min. by
means of jog or rapid feed, the position loop gain of the general diagnosis No. 0011 X axis of
the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen may fall within the range of 2985 ~ 3015.

P-6, P-34,
CN04 P2-03 Pr11 P-07
Parameters P-35,P-36
CN05 P2-04 Pr12 P-08
P-37,P-38
2) Same as 1) for the Y axis.
3) Same as 1) for the Z axis.
D) Activating the Automatic Position Loop Gain Compensation
Set the maintenance parameter of the SENTROL2 setup screen as follows:

5 bits of NO.1823 AUG
X: 0 1
Y: 0 1
Z: 0 1
E) Turn off an on the power of the SENTROL2.
F) Verifying the Adjustment of Position Loop Gain
1) Verify how many times the X axis should be moved to + and - directions at the speed of 2000 ~
3000 mm/min. by means of rapid feed so that the average of the position loop gains of general
NO.0011 X axis displayed on the SENTROL2 diagnosis screen, for both of + and directions
may fall within the range of 2985 ~ 3015.
4-
5.How to Adjust Servo
5.4 ,Zero Setting
5.4 Adjustment of Overshoot and Undershoot
Notice) If there are no special problems such as vibration and abnormal noise, it is not necessary
to adjust the below items:
A) Adjustment of Loop Gain

1) Make sure that, when moving the X axis at the highest/lowest speed by automatic operation, there
is no overshoot or undershoot for the waveform during acceleration or deceleration as shown in
the figure below through observing the real speed of the X axis using the servo waveform display
function (see page 4-25). Adjust the servo unit parameter if any overshoot or undershoot exists.
S
p (Decelerating)
e
e
d
(Accelerating)
Time

CN04 P-6, P-34
P2-03 Pr11 P-07
CN05 P-35,P-36
P2-04 Pr12 P-08
CN1A P-37,P-38
Parameters Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Auto Tuning
CN00 P2-22 Pr20 Auto Tuning
00-05 P2-23 Pr21 P-2
C- P2-24 Pr22
4-
5.5 Load Torque Check
A) Load Torque Check
1) When moving the X axis at the speed of 50 mm/min., use the display function of the servo unit
to check the load torque. Verify if the load torque becomes 33% or less.
YASKAW
LG PANASONIC MITSUBISHI DAEWOO
A
FDA-5000 MINAS MR-J2 AC SERVO
SIGMA
St-08 J P-32 8
(LoadRate%) (LoadRate%) (LoadRate%)
Parameters dP_oL
St-09 b P-32 9
(MaxLoad%) (MaxLoad%) (MaxLoad%)
B) If the load torque is higher than 50%, it is deemed the load is heavy.
4-
5.SERVO
5.6 Display Function of Servo Waveforms
A) Function Overview
Graphically displays the speed waveforms for adjusting the servo.
(Capable of displaying the waveforms such as the instruction value for spindle control, spindle
location, and spindle speed)
B) Use Condition
Set the parameter to 2001<SWD>=1.
C) How to Operate
1) Select the servo waveform display screen.

The following menu appears by selecting the diagnosis screen.
VELO
RUNHOUR CITY
Press down the VELOCITY menu to show the servo waveform display screen as follows:
MDI VELO MACHINE

DIAG
Mode CITY
DRAW
Servo Servo COT GEN-
DRAW
Setup
STRT Setup INVE DIAG
Fig. 5.6-1 Initial screen displaying the servo waveforms
4-
2) Servo Waveform Setup Screen

Press down the SET GRPH menu in the servo waveform display screen to show the servo
waveform setup screen.
MDI SET MACH

DIAG
Mode GRPH INE
VELO NEXT SEL

CITY
Fig. 5.6-2 Servo waveform setup screen
In this screen, setup any necessary items to display the servo waveforms.
Place the cursor at the corresponding position using the arrow menu and refer to the
description below, and then setup the items by pressing NEXT SEL or entering appropriate
values.
(DATA SELECT / DATA SCALE / TRIGGER CHANNELL / TRIGGER LEVEL
/ TRIGGER SLOPE / TIME SCALE / DATA OFFSET)
After confirming the setup configuration, go back to the servo waveform display screen by
pressing the VELOCITY.
*) Save function for servo data (manual operation mode excluded.)

1. Press the BuffSave to display INPUT FILE NO.
2. Enter the program number that is empty within the range of 1~9999.
3. The servo data lastly buffered as Oxxxx is saved.
4-
5.SERVO
A) DATA SELECT
It is possible to display the screens up to 4 channels simultaneously, and select each item
for each channel.
X: [AXIS SPEED] Actual speed of the spindle
X1: [COMMAND1] Instruction value before acceleration/deceleration
X2: [COMMAND2] Instruction value after acceleration/deceleration
X3: [DA-CNV] Value of DA-CONVERTER
X4: [POS ERR] Value of POSITION ERROR
X5: [POSITION] Spindle location
P: [POSITION CORDER] Spindle speed
B) DATA SCALE
Speed range of waveform display applicable to display the speed (X, X1, X2)
(mm/min)
Select out of [100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000].
C) TRIGGER CHANNELL
Select the targeted channel for trigger or select OFF.
*) The targets for trigger are X [AXIS SPEED] and X5 [POSITION].
D) TRIGGER LEVEL
When selecting axis speed: Select out of [0 +25 +50 +75 100 -100 -75 -50 -25 (%)],
based on the selected value from the data scale.
When selecting position: Enter the corresponding number for the trigger position.
E) TRIGGER SLOPE
Select either [+] or [-] according to the triggering direction. + means being accelerated,
while - being decelerated.
*) Example of trigger (in the case of selecting the axis speed trigger channel)
For DATA SCALE=1000, TRIGGER LEVEL=+50, and TRIGGER SLOPE=+,
start the measurement from the point of time when the data falls between 499 and 500.
(It is possible to display the waveform 2 to 3 seconds prior to the measurement
commencement.)
F) TIME SCALE
Select out of the time intervals of data display, [250 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 (msec)].
G) DATA OFFSET
Compensate this value for the value set at the data scale and display the waveform by
entering an appropriate number.
4-
3) Servo Waveform Display Screen
When pressing the DRAW STRT/CONTINUE and the buffering is completed (approx.
10 seconds), the waveform is displayed.

MDI VELO MACH

DIAG
Mode CITY INE
DRAW SET CON LEFT RGHT 0SET GEN-

GRPH INUE SHFT SHFT DIAG
STRT
Fig. 5.6-3 Servo waveform display screen
Zero position (zero setting) Location of the current cursor
Display the relative time to make the zero position (the basic is time to start measurement)
0.
Show the data and cursor positions that are currently displayed for the entire data.
Show the selected items, data values, and data unit for each channel.
Show the set speed range. (DATA SCALE + DATA OFFSET)
Show the current display time. (TIME SCALE)
DRAW STRT: Display the waveform after buffering. (Repressing the menu during
measurement will stop the operation.)
SET GRPH: Go to the servo waveform setup screen.
CONTINUE: Continuously display the waveform after buffering. (Repressing the menu
during continuous display will stop the operation.)
LEFT SHFT: Move the cursor position to the left.
RGHT SHFT: Move the cursor position to the right.
0 SET: Set the current cursor position to 0.
GEN-DIAG: Go to the general diagnosis menu.
4-
1. System Configuration
1. System Configuration
User PC
Operator's Box
DKU
(Display and
Keyboard Unit)
Machine
Operator's Panel
(OP. Panel)
Power Electric
Cabinet
Main Unit
I/O Device
Servo Unit
Servo Motor
Spindle Unit
Spindle Motor
Operator's Panel = OP. Panel

Power Electric Cabinet = Cabinet
I/O Device = FDD unit (floppy disk drive, etc.)
5-1
2. Configuration of Main Unit
Status Indicating LED Cooling Fan of Main

Unit
Power Status Indicating LED
+5V,+12V,-12V,+24V
Sentrol2
Make sure to fix
to the cabinet
using 4 screws.
Floppy Drive
+24V Fuse 2A
AC220V Fuse 5A
5-2
3. Connector Layouts
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit
3.1 Connectors of Main Unit
1) 4-axis (spindle included) specification
Sentrol2
Make sure to fix
to the cabinet
using 4 screws.
CNIN1 (Input DIO3 NO.1)
CNIN2 (Input DIO3 NO.2) CNA1
CNIN3 (Input DIO3 NO.3) (1st axis EPS3 NO.1)
CNACOUT
CNA2
CNOUT1 (Output DIO3 NO.1) (2nd axis EPS3 NO.1)
CNOUT2 (Output DIO3 NO.2) CNA3
CNOUT3 (Output DIO3 NO.3)
CNMPG1 (MPG NO.1)
CNACIN (EPS3 NO.1)
CNMPG2 (MPG NO.2)

CNR1 (EPS3 NO.1)
CND1 (LCD)
CNIO1 (I/O DIO3 NO.1) CNCOM2 (RS232C #2)
CNLAN
CND2 (KEY)
CNIO3 (I/O DIO3 NO.3)
CNMPG3 (MPG NO.3)
CNS1 (EPS3 NO.1)
(SPINDLE I/F)
5-3
2) 8-axis (spindle included) specification
Make sure to fix

to the cabinet
Sentrol2
using 4 screws.
CNA1 (1st axis EPS3/4 NO.1)

CNIN1 (Input DIO3 NO.1) CNA4 (4th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNIN2 (Input DIO3 NO.2)
CNA2 (2nd axis EPS3/4 NO.1)
CNACOUT CNA5 (5th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNOUT1 (Output DIO3 NO.1) CNA3 (3rd axis EPS3/4 NO.1)

CNOUT2 (Output DIO3 NO.2) CNA6 (6th axis EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNMPG1 (MPG NO.1)

CNACIN ((EPS3/4
/ NO.1))
CNR2 (EPS3/4 NO.2)
CNMPG2 (MPG NO.2)

CNR1 (EPS3 NO.1)
CND1 (LCD)
CNLAN
CND2 (KEY)
CNS1 (EPS3/4 NO.1)
(SPINDLE I/F) CNMPG3 (MPG NO.3)
CNS2 (EPS3/4 NO.2)
(SPINDLE I/F)
5-4
3.2 Connectors of DKU
3.2 Connectors of DKU (Display Keyboard Unit)
External Keyboard Connector Screen Adjustment Switch Board

CND2 (KEY)
(Rear View)
SCA3 UNIT RGB Unit

(Key Scan Board) ~ LCD Panel
Connecting
RGB UNIT Cable
LCD PANEL
(Back Light
Incorporated)
KEY16/18 UNIT
(SHEET KEYBOARD) Power Supply Unit
M4 Thread
Connecting
AC220V
BACK LIGHT INVERTER Connecting to the earth CND1 (LCD)
plate of the cabinet
Connectors Connectors of DKU Side

CND1 Dsub Connector 15 Pin Female
CND2 Dsub Connector 9 Pin Female
5-5
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 Board

1) In case that the item No. of the printed board is
after E371-18602
A) EPS4 board NO.1
CNA1 CNA2 CNA3 CNMPG1
CN24V Dsub25S Dsub25S Dsub25S Dsub9S

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT PC13,14,15

EPS4 board NO.1 CNR1
Dsub9S
CNS1
ItemNo.ofPrintedBoard E371-18602 Dsub25S
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
B) EPS4 board NO.2
CNA4 CNA5 CNA6

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS2
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
The output of spindle Insert photo coupler FUJI 5000M3

DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15 FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
The output of spindle Insert photo coupler SG-J,SF,
DO is Collector Common. into the PC16, 17, and 18. MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the

Insert photo coupler
interface of the servo
spindle
spindle. into the PC20 and 21.
21
5-6
3.3 Connectors of EPS4 BOARD
C) EPS4 board NO.3

CNA7 CNA8 CNA9

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS3
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
D) EPS3 board NO.4
CNA10 CNA11 CNA12

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS4
PC20,21
PC16,17,18

DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15. FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the Insert photo coupler

interface
of the servo spindle. into the PC20 and 21.
5-7
3.4 Connectors of EPS3 Board

1) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17002
or E371-17004 (new version)
A) EPS3 board NO.1
CN24V CNA1 CNA2 CNA3 CNMPG1
Dsub25S Dsub25S Dsub25S Dsub9S

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
or E371-17004
E371-17002

Dsub9S
CNS1
Item No. of Printed Board Dsub25S
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
B) EPS3 board NO.2
CN24V CNA4 CNA5 CNA6

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
or E371-17004
E371-17002

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS2
PC20,21
PC16,17,18

DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15 FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
YASKAWA VS626VM3
Use CNS1 as the

Insert photo coupler
interface of the servo
spindle
spindle. into the PC20 and 21.
21
5-8
3.4 Connectors of EPS3 BOARD
C) EPS3 board NO.3


(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
or E371-17004
E371-17002

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS3
PC20,21
PC16,17,18
D) EPS3 board NO.4

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
or E371-17004
E371-17002

Insert a Dsub9S
short pin.
CNS4
PC20,21
PC16,17,18

DO is Emitter Common. into the PC13, 14, and 15. FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
YASKAWA VS626VM3

interface
of the servo spindle. into the PC20 and 21.
5-9
2) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17001 (old version)
A) EPS3 board NO.1
CN24V CNA1 CNA2 CNA3 CNMPG1

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
E371-17001
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT PC50~55

EPS3 board NO.1 PC60~65 CNR1
Dsub9S
CNS1
PC70,71,72,48
B) EPS3 board NO.2

(Dsub 25PIN FEMALE)
E371-17001
JP8:BOARD NO. SELECT PC50~55

EPS3 board NO.2 PC60~65 CNR2
Insert a short Dsub9S
pin.
CNS2
PC70,71,72,48

DO is Emitter Common. into the PC50 ~ 55. FUJI 5000MS5
MITSUBISHI
DO is Collector Common. into the PC60~65. MDS-A-SPA,SPJA
YASKAWA VS626VM3

interface
into the PC70, 71,
of the servo spindle.
72 and 48
72, 48.
5-10
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 BOARD
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 Board

after E371-17105
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1 CNOUT1
Dsub37S Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE) (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
E371-17105
JP1:BOARD NO. SELECT

DIO3 board NO.1
CNIO1
Dsub37S
Item No. of Printed Board (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
B) DIO3 board NO.2

CNIN2 CNOUT2
Dsub37S Dsub37S
E371-17105

DIO3 board NO.2
Insert a CNIO2
short pin. Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
Item No. of Printed Board
C) DIO3 board NO.3

CNIN3 CNOUT3
Dsub37S Dsub37S
E371-17105

DIO3 board NO.3
Insert a CNIO3
short pin. Dsub37S
Item No
No. of Printed Board (Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
5-11

E371-17101, E371-17102, and E371-17104
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1 CNOUT1
Dsub37S Dsub37S
or E371-17102, 4

E371-17101

DIO3 board NO.1
CNIO1
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
B) DIO3 board NO.2

CNIN2 CNOUT2
Dsub37S Dsub37S
or E371-17102,4

E371-17101

DIO3 board NO.2
CNIO2
Dsub37S
(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
C) DIO3 board NO.3

CNIN3 CNOUT3
Dsub37S Dsub37S
or E371-17102,4

E371-17101

DIO3 board NO.3
CNIO3
Dsub37S
(Dsub
( 37PIN FEMALE))
Item No.
No of Printed Board
5-12
3.5 Connectors of DIO3 BOARD
3) In case that the item No. of the printed board is E371-17100
A) DIO3 board NO.1
CNIN1 CNOUT1
Dsub37S Dsub37S
E371-17100

DIO3 board NO.1 : OPEN
Item No. of Printed Board Dsub37S CNIO1

(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
B) DIO3 board NO.2

CNIN2 CNOUT2
Dsub37S Dsub37S
E371-17100

DIO3 board NO.2 : CLOSE
Item No. of Printed Board Dsub37S CNIO2

(Dsub 37PIN FEMALE)
5-13
4. Installation
4.1 Enviromental Requirements for Installation
1) Ambient Temperature
Operation: 0 ~ 45
Storage: -20 ~ 60
2) Humidity: 75% or less
3) Vibration: 0.5G or less during operation
4) Power supply: AC220V 10% , 50/60Hz 1Hz
4.2 Power Supply Capacity

Capacity of 0.4KVA + Servo Unit
Refer to the specification of each servo motor because the capacity of
the servo unit depends on the motor type.
4.3 Design Requirements for Cabinet
1) Completely enclosed structure
2) Designed to have the internal temperature rise of the cabinet 10 or less,
compared with the external temperature.
3) Designed to make air flow at the degree of 0.5m/sec through the surface of
each unit using a fan.
However, be sure not to have each unit face the air flow directly.
4) As a noise countermeasure, make sure to mount each unit with a gap more
than 100 mm at the cable of DC50V or higher, or AC power supply.
5) There should exist at least 100 mm of space at the top and bottom of the main
unit.
100 mm
or more
FAN FAN FAN
MAIN UNIT
100 mm
or more
Cabinet
4.4 Heating Value of UNIT Heating Value
Each Unit MAIN UNIT 150W
DKU (for SENTROL2) 30W
DKU (for PNC2) 125W
4.5 About Use of Indirect Cooler

An indirect cooler efficiently discharges the internal heat to the outside while
completely blocking the outside and the inside of the cabinet, even under the
the worst environmental conditions including dusts, oils, and
moisture, further enhancing the controller's stable operation and reliability.
Therefore, it is highly recommended to use an indirect cooler.
4.6 Dust Protection Countermeasure

There is a high possibility for insulation deterioration in the main unit or the
DKU (Display Keyboard Unit) due to dusty environment, thus make sure to block
the cabinet door and the cable inlet using a packing.
packing
5-14
4. Installation
4.7 Noise Countermeasure
4.7 Noise Countermeasure

1) Separation of Signal Cables
The mechanical wiring is grouped shown as the table below.
The Group A shall be separated from the Group B and C by 100 mm or more.
GROUP Wirings Measures
AC line at the primary side Make sure to separate from the
AC line at the secondary side Group B and C by 100 mm or more.
Power cable Attach a spark killer or
A Power cable of AC, DC motor, and a diode to the solenoid and relay.
servo/spindle motor
AC solenoid
AC relay
DC solenoid (24V) Make sure to separate from the Group
DC relay (24V) A by 100 mm or more.
B Main unit ~ switch, lamp, and relay Attach a spark killer or a diode to the
RIO1/RIO2 board ~ switch and LEDs solenoid and relay.
Main unit ~ 24V AVR Make sure to separate from the Group
RIO1/RIO2 board ~ 24V AVR A by 100 mm or more.
It is recommended to use a shielded
cable.
Main unit ~ servo unit Make sure to separate from the Group
Main unit ~ MPG A by 100 mm or more.
C Main unit ~ DKU Use a shielded cable and
Main unit ~ RS232C connect the shield of the shielded
Main unit ~ RIO1/RIO2 board cable to the ground.
2) Ground
A) Unit Ground
Cabinet DKU
(For SENTROL2)
(For PNC2)
MAIN UNIT
FG
CNACIN-2 CNACOUT-4 SERVO

AC220V UNIT
Power
supply input
RIO1 board
RIO2 board SPINDLE
UNIT SERVO MOTOR
Above 1.25 (SQ)
EARTH PLATE
SPINDLE MOTOR
Factory Ground
5-15
B) Make sure to fix the main unit to the cabinet.
M4 Thread M4 Thread
C) Shielding a shielded cable

Connector Connector
Shielded cable
Signal Signal
0V 0V
MAIN UNIT SERVO UNIT

SPINDLE UNIT, etc.
EARTH PLATE
3) Spark Killer/Diode
As noise countermeasure, be sure to connect spark killers / diodes

to the both ends of the coils of relay, MC (Magnetic Contactor), solenoid, etc.
Connect a spark killer for AC, while a diode for DC.
A) Spark Killer
AC RELAY Resistance (R): Corresponds to the DC
AC SOLENOID resistance of the coil.
MC CAPACITANCE(C) :
I I
~ ()
10 20
I: Ampere (A) for a normal coil

SPARK KILLER
B) Diode
DC RELAY
0V 24V
DIODE 1A, 2000V
5-16
1.How to View Diagnosis Sereen
1. How to View Diagnosis Screen

The diagnosis screen shows I/O signals of a machine and the status of internal data. This screen includes 4
menus as followings:
MISC DATA : Displays each data value in the NC and the status of signal on/off.
RUN HOUR : Displays the total result of the NC uptime.
TIMER: Displays and configures the set value of the timer in PLC.
COUNTER: Displays and configures the set value and the current value of the counter in PLC.
KEEP RELAY: Displays and configures the keep relay data in PLC.
DATA TABLE: Displays and configures the data in the data table.
PLC DIAG : Displays the state of on/off for each signal in PLC.
LADDER: Displays ladders and shows and retrieve dynamics of each relay and coil.
MONITOR: Used to check the states of machine I/O signals.
The menus of the diagnosis screen are composed of:
Menus of NC
MISC RUN PLC
diagnosis screen
DATA HOUR
Function menus are displayed

Select each NC diagnosis screen. according to each NC diagnosis
screen.
Select the PLC screen.
Menus of PLC
)
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
screen selected
Function menus are displayed

according to each PLC screen.
Menus to select TIMER COU KEEP DATA PLC LADD MONI
PLC screen NTER RELY TABL DIAG ER TOR
)
To the menu
Menus to select SEQ SEQ
)
MISC RUN
NC diagnosis RUN IN
screen DATA HOUR
Used to operate PLC RAM

To the menu (Displayed in the case of the parameter 2001 RAM=1,
SQC=1)
6-1
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1 (in the order of addresses)
ADDRESS BIT SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

0 *IT Interlock signal for total axes
1 *CSL Interlock signal to start the cutting block
2 UINT Macro interrupt signal
3 SKIP1 Skip signal 1
G00
4 *ESP Emergency stop
5 *SP Quiescence signal for automatic operation
6 RRW Reset & rewind signals
7 ERS External reset signal
0 *AIT Interlock signal for total axes of automatic operation
1 *BSL Interlock signal to start a block
2 AE1 Signal 1 indicating arrival at the measuring
G01
0
1
2
3
G02
4
5
6
7
0 ZRN Selecting signal for ref. point return mode
1 H Selecting signal for manual handle feed
2 J Selecting signal for continuous manual feed
3 D Selecting signal for manual data input
G03
4 T Selecting signal for tape instruction
5 MEM Selecting signal for memory instruction
6 EDT Selecting signal for editing tape memory
7
0 AFL Lock signal for auxiliary functions
1 DRN Dryrun signal
2 BDTI Optional block skip signal
3 SBK Single block signal
G04
4 OVC Override cancel signal
5 ABS Absolute conversion signal
6
7 MLK Machine lock signal
6-2
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.1 PLC Signal List 1

0 ST Startup signal for automatic operation
1 FIN Completion signal
2
3
G05
4 KEY1 Memory protection key 1
0 SCMP Spindle clamp
1 M01 M01 valid/invalid
2 MP1 Selection of the movement amount by
manual handle feed 1
3 MP2 Selection of the movement amount by
G06
manual handle feed 2
4
5 ROV1 Rapid traverse rate 1
6 ROV2 Rapid traverse rate 2
7 RT Selecting signal for manual dispatch
0 BDI2 Optional block skip 2 signal
G07
0 *CHF Chamferring signal
1
2 TLMI Input signal for measuring the tool lengths
3 MRET Input signal for measuring the tool lengths
G08
4
5
6 RVS Reverse movement signal (SENTROL2-C)
7
0 TL01 Signal for tool group number
G09
7 TLSKP Tool skip signal
0 HS3A Selection of the manual handle feed axis
1 HS3B Selection of the manual handle feed axis
2 HS3C Selection of the manual handle feed axis
3 HS3D Selection of the manual handle feed axis
G10
4
5
6
7 TLRST Reset signal for tool replacement
6-3

G11
0 *FV0 Feed rate override
G12
0 *JV0 Manual feed rate override
G15
0 SYNC9 Asynchronous control selecting signal
G16
G17
0 SOVR0 Spindle override input
G18
6-4
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 WN1 Search for external work numbers
G19
0 RI300 Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
G20
G21
4
5
6
7 RISGN3 Instruction signal for spindle motor speed
G22
G23
4
5
6
6-5

G24
G25
4
5
6
G26
G27
4
5
6
0
1
2 RGTMD3 Completion signal of rigid selection
3
G28
4 RDY3 All set.
5 ALMR3 Alarm reset
6
7
0
1 HSP3 High-speed tap signal
2
3
G29
4 *ESP3 Emergence stop
5 CRSRV3 Instruction for reverse rotation
6 CRSFR3 Instruction for forward rotation
7 ORCM3 Orient instruction
6-6
2. PLC Diagnosis

0
1
2 RGTMD4 Completion signal of rigid selection
3
G30
4 RDY4 All set.
5 ALMR4 Alarm reset
6
7
0
2
3
G31
4 *ESP4 Emergency stop
0 EXPUN Start signal of external punch
1 EXRD Start signal of external read
2 EXSTP Stop signal of external read/punch
3
G32 4
5 EOREND Read
R d completion
l i signal
i l ffor externall ddata
output
6 ERDRQ Request signal for external data output
7 EISTB Strobe signal for external data input
0 EIA0 Address signal for external data input
G33
0 EID0 Data signal for external data input
G34
G35
6 EID14 Data signal
g for external data inputp
6-7

G36
G37
G38
G39
0 RPB8 Response signal for universal switches of software operator's panel
G40
G41
7 RPB7 p
Response g for universal switches of software operator's
signal p ppanel
6-8
2. PLC Diagnosis

0
1
2 RIGTMD1 Completion signal of rigid selection
3
G42
4 RDY1 All set.
5 ALMR1 Alarm reset
6
7
0
2
3
G43
0 RPB16 Response signal for universal switches of software
operator's panel
operator's panel
operator's panel
G44 operator's panel
operator's panel
operator's panel
operator's panel
0
1
2 RIGTMD2 Completion signal of rigid selection
3
G45
4 RDY2 All set.
5 ALMR2 Alarm reset
6
7
0
2
3
G46
0 TRMOD Starting tracing function
1 NOMCL2 Setting nominal clearance
2 NOMCL3 Setting nominal clearance
3
G47
4
5
6
7
6-9

0 UI000 Input signal for custom macro
G48
G49
G50
G51
G52
G53
6-10
2. PLC Diagnosis

G54
G55
G56
4 UI204 Input
p signal
g for custom macro
G57
G58
G59
6-11

G60
G61
G62
G63
0 *+L1 Over travel signal
1 *-L1 Over travel signal
2
3
G64
4 *IT1 Interlock signal by axis
5 HINT1 Interrupt permission for the 1st axis handle
6 *SVF1 Servo off signal
7
0 +J1 Selection signal for feed axis and its direction
1 -J1 Selection signal for feed axis and its direction
2 MI1 Mirror image signal
3 MLK1 Machine lock signal
G65
4 ADEC1 Automatic ref. point return
5 PCAX1 Input signal for PLC control axis
6 +MIT1 Measurement value for offset amount
7 -MIT1 Measurement value for offset amount
6-12
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 EOR00 Overriding the cutting feed rate of the PC control axis
G66
0 EC00 Axis control instruction
3 EMSBK1 Prohibition signal against block stop
G67
4 ESBK1 Block stop signal
5 ESTP1 Break signal for axis control
6 ECLR1 Reset signal
7 EBUF1 Delivery signal for axis control instruction
0 EIF000 Cutting feed rate, spindle speed
G68
4 EIF004 Cutting
g feed rate, spindle
p speed
p
G69
0 ED000 Axis travel, dwell time, direction of spindle
G70
G71
7 ED015 Axis travel
travel, dwell time,
time direction of spindle
6-13

G72
G73
Same as G64~G73 (1st axis) to the rest.

(G74~G83) 2nd axis (G144~G153) 9th axis
(G84~G93) 3rd axis (G154~G163) 10th axis
(G94~G103) 4th axis (G164~G173) 11th axis
(G214~G223) 16th axis

0 HSF00 Handle Feed Step Data
G224
G225
6-14
2. PLC Diagnosis

G226
G227
7 HSFON Effective Handle Feed Step
0 ZRN11 1st axis 1st ref. point return
1 ZRN12 1st axis 2nd ref. point return
2 ZRN13 1st axis 3rd ref. point return
3 ZRN14 1st axis 4th ref. point return
G228
4 ZRN21 2nd axis 1st ref. ppoint return
5 ZRN22 2nd axis 2nd ref. point return
6 ZRN23 2nd axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRN24 2nd axis 4th ref. point return
0 ZRN31 3rd axis 1st ref. point return
1 ZRN32 3rd axis 2nd ref. point return
2 ZRN33 3rd axis 3rd ref. point return
3 ZRN34 3rd axis 4th ref. point return
G229
4 ZRN41 4th axis 1st ref. point return
5 ZRN42 4th axis 2nd ref. point return
6 ZRN43 4th axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRN44 4th axis 4th ref. point return
G230
G231
7 ZRN84 8th axis 4th ref.
ref point return
6-15

G232
4 ZRNA1 10th axis 1st ref. point return
5 ZRNA2 10th axis 2nd ref. point return
6 ZRNA3 10th axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRNA4 10th axis 4th ref. point return
0 ZRNB1 11th axis 1st ref. point return
1 ZRNB2 11th axis 2nd ref. point return
2 ZRNB3 11th axis 3rd ref. point return
3 ZRNB4 11th axis 4th ref. point return
G233
4 ZRNC1 12th axis 1st ref. point return
5 ZRNC2 12th axis 2nd ref. point return
6 ZRNC3 12th axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRNC4 12th axis 4th ref. point return
0 ZRND1 13th axis 1st ref. point return
1 ZRND2 13th axis 2nd ref. point return
2 ZRND3 13th axis 3rd ref. point return
3 ZRND4 13th axis 4th ref. point return
G234
4 ZRNE1 14th axis 1st ref. point return
5 ZRNE2 14th axis 2nd ref.
ref point return
6 ZRNE3 14th axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRNE4 14th axis 4th ref. point return
0 ZRNF1 15th axis 1st ref. point return
1 ZRNF2 15th axis 2nd ref. point return
2 ZRNF3 15th axis 3rd ref. point return
3 ZRNF4 15th axis 4th ref. point return
G235
4 ZRNG1 16th axis 1st ref. point return
5 ZRNG2 16th axis 2nd ref. point return
6 ZRNG3 16th axis 3rd ref. point return
7 ZRNG4 16th axis 4th ref. point return
0 PATCR External return key for working setup
1 PATUP External cursor up key for working setup
2 PATDWN External cursor down key for working setup
3 ASET Indication number setting for working setup in automatic
system mode
G236
4 MSET Indication number setting for working setup in manual
system mode
5
6
7
0 PAT*1 Indication number setting for working setup *1
G237
7
6-16
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 JGPS01 1st axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
value of machine coordinates
1 JGPS02 2nd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
2 JGPS03 3rd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
3 JGPS04 4th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated by
G238
1 JGPS10 10th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog designated
by value of machine coordinates
G239
0 CAL101 O9700 Executing calculation of the line 1 text
G240
G241
G242
G243
5 CAL214 O9701 Executing
E i calculation
l l i off theh li
line 14 text
6-17
Same as G240.0~G241.7 (CAL101~116 O9700) and

G242.0~G243.7 (CAL201~216 O9701) to the rest.
G244.0~G245.7 (CAL301~316 O9702)
G246.0~G247.7 (CAL401~416 O9703)
G248.0~G249.7 (CAL501~516 O9704)
G250.0~G251.7 (CAL601~616 O9705)
G252.0~G253.7 (CAL701~716 O9706)
G254.0~G255.7 (CAL801~816 O9707)
6-18
2. PLC Diagnosis

0
1 AL Singal during alarming
2 RST Signal during reset
3 SPL Signal during quiescence of automatic operation
F00
4 STL Signal during startup of automatic operation
5 OP Signal during automatic operation
6 SA Completion signal for servo ready
7 MA Completion signal for control unit ready
0 DEN Completion signal for distribution
1 IPEN Completion signal for distribution
2 DST Startup signal for manual data input
3 INCH Input signal for inch
F01
4 TAP Signal during tapping
5 RPD Signal during rapid feed
6 THRD Signal during threading screws
7 CSS Signal during constant primary speed
0
1 CUT Signal during cutting
2 *ESPM Emergency stop
3 DSP Feed hold key
F02
4 TLMO Output
p signal
g for measuring g tool length
g
5 ROTMV Status output signal during movement of rotatation axis
6
7
0 MZRN Notification signal for ref. point return mode
1 MH Validation signal for selecting manual handle feed
2 MJ Validation signal for selecting manual continuous feed
3 MD Validation signal for selecting manual data input
F03
4 MT Validation signal for selecting tape instruction
5 MMEM Validation signal for selecting memory instruction
6 MEDT Validation signal for selecting tape memory edit
7
0 MAFL Validation signal for locking auxiliary functions
1 MDRN Validation signal for dryrun
2 MBDT1 Validation signal for optional block skip 1
3 MSBK Validation signal for single block
F04
4 MM01 M01 switch of software operator's panel
5 MABS Validation signal for converting to absolute
6
7 MMLK Validation signal for machine lock
0 MBDI2 Validation signal for optional block skip 2
F05
6-19

0 PSALM Alarm for program operation error
1 SVALM Servo alarm
2 OHALM Over heat alarm
3 OTALM Over travel alarm
F06
4 SYALM Alarm for abnormality of control unit
5 MFOC Feed override cancel
6 MSOC Spindle override cancel
7 MKEY Protection key switch for software operator's panel
0 EMGLS Emergency L/S signal
1 EDTCHK Check signal for automatic operation (edit mode)
2 SMPON Signal for servo main power on
3 RTAP Status signal of rigid mode
F07
4 RPBSY Signal during read/punch
5 ESEND Completion signal for external search
6 TLCHA Signal for tool replacement
7 TLCHB Signal for tool replacement
0 MF Strobe signal for auxiliary functions
1 SF Strobe signal for spindle function
2 TF Stroble signal for tool function
3 BF Strobe signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
F08
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
F09
4 DM00 Decode M signal
0 RO00 Speed signal of instructing spindle
F10
F11
6-20
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 AR00 Actual speed signal of spindle
F12
F13
0 MR00 Signal for maximum speed of spindle
F14
4 MR04 Signal
g for maximum speed p of spindle
p
F15
0 M00 Code signal for auxiliary functions
F16
F17
6-21

F18
F19
0 S00 Code signal for spindle function
F20
F21
F22
F23
6-22
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 T00 Code signal for tool function
F24
F25
F26
4 T20 Code signal
g for tool function
F27
0 B00 Code signal for the 2nd auxiliary functions
F28
F29
6-23

F30
F31
0 PRECH Nominal clearance state
1 FAR Far state
2 COLLIS Collision state
3
F32
4
5 EIREND Read completion signal for external data input
6
7 EOSTB Strobe signal for external data output
0 EOA0 Address signal for external data output
F33
0 EOD00 Data signal for external data output
F34
F35
6-24
2. PLC Diagnosis

F36
F37
F38
F39
0 SOR0 Spindle override
F40
0
1
2
3
F41
4 ORAR2 Orient completion signal
5 *SPAL2 Spindle trouble signal
6 SST2 Zero speed signal
7 SARM2 Signal for indicating access to a designated speed
6-25

0 PB8 Universal switches of software operator's panel
F42
F43
0
1
2
3
F44
F45
0 RAFL Request for auxiliary function lock
1 RDRN Request for dryrun
2 RBDT1 Request for optional block skip
3 RSBK Request for single block
F46
4 RM01 Request for M01
5 RABS Request for manual absolute
6 ROVC Request for feed override cancel
7 RMLK Request for machine lock
0 RCLMA Requesting output signal for software operator's panel
1 SUCLP Request signal for unclamping the spindle
2 SCLP Request signal for clamping the spindle
3
F47
4
5 RCHIP Requesting output signal for software operator's panel
6
7 RCLCA Requesting output signal for software operator
operator'ss panel
6-26
2. PLC Diagnosis

0 UO000 Output signal for custom macro
F48
F49
F50
4 UO020 Output
p signal
g for custom macro
F51
F52
F53
6-27

F54
F55
F56
F57
F58
F59
6-28
2. PLC Diagnosis

F60
F61
F62
4 UO320 Output
p signal
g for custom macro
F63
0 ZP1 Signal of completing return to the reference point
1 ZP21 Signal of completing return to the 2nd reference point
2 MV1 Signal during axis travel
3 MD1 Travel direction signal
F64
4 ZP31 Signal of completing return to the 3rd reference point
5 ZP41 Signal of completing return to the 4th reference point
6 INP1 Inposition signal
7 *ENB1 Validation signal for servo off
0 MMI1 Validation signal for mirror image
1
2
3
F65
4
5
6
7 RPRF1 Signal of completing return to the reference point
6-29

0
1
2 EIAL1 Alarm signal
3
F66
4
5 EOTP1 Signal for over travel plus direction
6 EOTN1 Signal for over travel minus direction
7 EBSY1 Import signal of instructing axis control
0 ZP2 Signal of completing return to the reference point
1 ZP22 Signal of completing return to the 2nd reference point
2 MV2 Signal during axis travel
3 MD2 Travel direction signal
F68
4 ZP32 Signal of completing return to the 3rd reference point
5 ZP42 Signal of completing return to the 4th reference point
6 INP2 Inposition signal
7 *ENB2 Validation signal for servo off
0 MMI2 Validation signal for mirror image
1
2
3
F69
4
5
6
7 RPRF2 Signal of completing return to the reference point
0
1
2 EIAL2 Alarm signal
3
F70
4
5 EOTP2 Signal for over travel plus direction
6 EOTN2 Signal for over travel minus direction
7 EBSY2 Import signal of instructing axis control
Same as F64~F67 (1st axis) and F68~F71 (2nd axis) to the rest.
(F72~F75) 3rd axis, (F76~F79) 4th axis, (F80~F83) 5th axis, (F84~F87) 6th axis
(F88~F91) 7th axis, (F92~F95) 8th axis, (F96~F99) 9th axis, (F100~F103) 10th axis
(F104~F107) 11th axis, (F108~F111) 12th axis, (F112~F115) 13th axis,
(F116~F119) 14th axis (F120~F123) 15th axis, (F124~F127) 16th axis
6-30
2. PLC Diagnosis

0
1
2
3
F128
0
1
2
3
F129
0 ANLG10 Analog data input signal
F130
4 ANLG14 Analogg data input
p signal
g
2 ANLG1A Analog data input signal
3 ANLG1B Analog data input signal
F131
4
5
6
7
F132.0 ~ F133.3 (ALNG20~2B CHANNEL2)

F134.0 ~ F135.3 (ALNG30~3B CHANNEL3)
F136.0 ~ F137.3 (ALNG40~4B CHANNEL4)
F138.0 ~ F139.3 (ALNG50~5B CHANNEL5)
F140.0 ~ F141.3 (ALNG60~6B CHANNEL6)
F142.0 ~ F143.3 (ALNG70~7B CHANNEL7)
F144.0 ~ F145.3 (ALNG80~8B CHANNEL8)
6-31

0 JGFN01 Completion of 1st axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
designated by value of machine coordinates
1 JGFN02 Completion of 2nd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
2 JGFN03 Completion of 3rd axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
3 JGFN04 Completion of 4th axis movement through rapid feed of the jog
F146
F147
0 PT_A1 Currently indicated working setup number in automatic system
mode
mode
mode
mode
F148
mode
mode
mode
mode
0 PT_M1 Currently indicated working setup number in manual system mode
F149
0 KEYF01 Validation of F1 key input
F150
5 KEYF06 Validation of F6 keyy input
p
6-32
2. PLC Diagnosis

F151
4
5
6
7 PDATLD Validation signal for data load
0
1 RPRV Origin reverse PB on
2 RXYCHG X and Y axes replacement PB on
3 RMIRY Request PB on for mirror image of Y axis
F152
4 RMIRX Request PB on for mirror image of X axis
5 RPHCAN Request PB on for canceling preheating
6 RPRHT Request PB on for extending preheating
7
6-33

X0~X4 Machine PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
X114 No. 1 made by the user
X300 Machine PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
~ X305 No. 2 made by the user
X306 Machine PLC input signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
X400 Machine PLC input signal of the RIO2 board
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
~ X420 No 5 made by the user
No.
0~7
0~7
0~7
X100 Operation panel PLC input signal of the RIO1 board
0~7
X108
~ X113 Operation panel PLC input signal of the RIO1 board
0~7
X200 No. 2 made by the user
~ X201
6-34
2. PLC Diagnosis

Y0~Y4 Machine PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
Y412 No. 1 made by the user
Y300 Machine PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
~ Y305 No. 2 made by the user
Y306 Machine PLC output signal of the DIO3 board
0~7
Y400 Machine PLC output signal of the RIO2 board
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~7
0~77
0
~ Y420 N 5 made
No. d bby th
the user
0~7
0~7
0~7
Y100 Operator's panel PLC output signal of the RIO1 board
0~7
Y108
~ Y112 Operator's panel PLC output signal of the RIO1 board
0~7
Y200 No. 2 made by the user
~ Y202
6-35

R0 Internal relay
~ 0~7 (Read only data for R500~R519)
R519
Each point = 0 : Request for eliminating message
A0 1 : Request for displaying message
~ 0~7 Each point (bit) becomes a flag to request for displaying
A24 a corresponding message. One message can be up to
128 characters.
K0 Keep relay
~ 0~7
K15
Ring counter
C0 Count range: 0 ~ 32767
~ One counter occupies 4 bytes (2 bytes: preset value,
0~7
C79 2 bytes: accumulated value).
Assign counter numbers (1~20)
for sequence programming.
D0 Data table
~ 0~7
D511
Variable timer
Data 1 sec. long timer (No.1 ~ 8)
without (Range: 1 sec. ~ 32767 sec.)
0~7
address 10 msec. short timer (No.9 ~ 40)
(Range: 10 msec. ~ 32767 msec.)
Data Fixed timer (up to 100)

without (Range: 10 msec. ~ 327.67 sec.)
0~7
address
6-36
2. PLC Diagnosis
2.2 PLC Signal List 2 (in the order of functions)
NO Function NC PLC Signal PLC NC Signal Description

1 Preliminary SMPON (F07.2) Servo main power on
functions MA (F00.7) All control units set.
SA (F00.6) Servo setting finished.
2 Reset ERS(G00.7) Request for external reset
Emergency *ESPM (F02.2) Emergency at the NC side
stop *ESP (G00.4) Request for emergency stop
RRW (G00.6) Request for reset & rewind
*RST (F00.2) Status of reset key
Emergency EMGLS (F07.0) Status of EMG. L/S on

L/S
3 Interlock *IT (G00.0) (Automatic/Manual) request for
interlocking all axes
*AIT (G01.0) (Automatic) request for
interlocking all axes
*CSL (G00.1) Cutting block start interlock
*BSL (G01.1) Block start interlock
*IT1 (G64.4) Interlocking the 1st axis

*IT2 (G74.4) Interlocking the 2nd axis
*IT3 (G84.4) Interlocking the 3rd axis
4 Servo off *SVF1 (G64.6) Request for servo off of the 1st axis
SVF2 (G74.6)
*SVF2 Servo off of the 2nd axis
*SVF3 (G84.6) Servo off of the 3rd axis
*ENB1 (F64.7) Notification of the state of the 1st
axis servo off
*ENB2 (F68.7) Notification of the state of the 2nd
axis servo off
*ENB (F72.7) Notification of the state of the 3rd
axis servo off
5 Over travel *-L1 (G64.1) 1st axis-over travel
(Hard) *+L1 (G64.0) 1st axis+over travel
*-L2 (G74.1) 2nd axis-over travel
*+L2 (G74.0) 2nd axis+over travel
*-L3 (G84.1) 3rd axis-over travel
*+L3 (G84.0) 3rd axis+over travel
6 Automatic DST (F01.2) Input of DKU automatic start key
start ST (G05.0) Request for starting automatic
operation
Feed/hold *SP (G00.5) Request for stopping automatic
operation
DSP (F02.3) Input of DKU feed hold key
Automatic OP (F00.5) Indication under automatic

operation
operation STL (F00.4) Indication under starting
automatic operation
condition SPL (F00.3) Indication under stopping
automatic operation
7 Alarm AL (F00.1) Under alarm generation
PSALM (F06.0) Under program alarm generation
SVALM (F06.1) Servo alarm
OHALM (F06.2) Over heat alarm
OTALM (F06.3) over travel alarm
SYALM (F06
(F06.4)
4) System alarm
6-37

8 Auxiliary M00~M31 M code output (4 bytes)
functions (F16.0~F19.7)
MF (F08.0) M flag strobe signal
Spindle S00~S31 S code output (4 bytes)

SF (F08.1) S flag strobe signal
Tool T00~T31 T code output (4 bytes)

TF (F08.2) T flag strobe signal
Secondary B00~B31 B code output (4 bytes)

auxiliary (F28.0~F31.7)
functions BF (F08.3) B flag strobe signal
Distribution DEN (F01.0) Distribution completed and

inposition
completed IPEN (F01.1) Distribution completed
Completion FIN (G05.1) M, S, T, and B codes completion

signal signal
Decode M DM00 (F09.4) M00 execution
i l
signal DM01 (F09 5)
(F09.5) i
M01 execution
DM02 (F09.6) M02 execution
DM30 (F09.7) M30 execution
9 Spindle RO00~RO15 Instructed number of spindle
control (F10.0~F11.7) revolutions (2 bytes)
(for the first
spindle) AR00~AR15 Actual number of spindle
(F12.0~F13.7) revolutions
(2 bytes from position coder)
MR00~MR15 Number of clamp revolutions
(F14.0~15.7) (2 bytes)
MSOC (F06.6) Spindle override cancel

SOR0~7 (F40) Spindle override 50%~150%
SARM1 (F44.7) Access signal to spindle speed

SST1 (F44.6) 0 speed signal
*SPAL1 (F44.5) Spindle trouble
ORAR1 (F44.4) Orientation completed
SCMP (G06.0) Spindle clamped
SOVR0~7 (G18) Spindle override input
RIGN1 (G25.7) 0 instruction voltage +
RI100~RI111 Instruction voltage
(G24.0~G25.3) Instruction (12 bits)
ALMR1 (G42.5) Alarm reset

RDY1 (G42.4) Ready for spindle
ORCM1 (G43.7) Orientation instruction
CRSFR1 (G43.6) Forward rotation of spindle
CRSRV1 (G43
(G43.5)
5) Reverse rotation of spindle
*ESP1 (G43.4) Emergency stop of spindle
6-38
2. PLC Diagnosis

9 Rigid tapping RTAP(F07.3) Notification of instruction for
rigid tapping mode
RGTMD1 (G42.2) Signal for rigid mode selection
ready
HSP1 (G43.1) High speed tapping mode
Decision SPSTP(G26.0) Validation signal for spindle

function for stop
spindle SUCLP(F47.1) Signal requesting for
position unclampping spindle
*SEUCL(G26.2) Completion signal for
unclampping spindle
SCLP(F47.2) Signal requesting for clampping
spindle
*SECLP(G26.3) Completion signal for clampping
spindle
10 Soft operator PB8~15 (F42) Switch input signal for operator's
Panel input PB0~7 (F43) panel
signal PB16~23 (F45)
Program RMLK(F46.7) Machine lock S/W input signal

screen Key ROVC(F46.6) Override cancel S/W
RABS(F46.5) Manual absolute S/W
RM01(F46.4)
01( 46 4) M01
01 S/W
S/
RSBK(F46.3) Single block S/W
RBDT1(F46.2) Optional block skip S/W
RDRN(F46.1) Dry run S/W
RAFL(46.0) Aux. function lock S/W
RCLMA(F47.0) Coolant manual S/W
RCLCA(F47.7) Coolant cancel S/W
RCHIP(47.5) Chip conveyor S/W
Soft operator RPB8~15 (G40) Request for displaying the

Panel S/W RPB0~7 (G41) status of operator's panel S/W
state RPB16~23 (G44)
Memory KEY1(G05.4) Request for memory protection

protection KEY2(G05.5) Request for memory protection
KEY3(G05.6) Request for memory protection
KEY4(G05.7) Request for memory protection
MKEY(F06.7) Memory protection status
6-39

11 Automatic AFL(G04.0) Request for auxiliary function
operation lock
test MAFL(F04.0) State of auxiliary function lock
DRN(G04.1) Request for dry run
MDRN(F04.1) State of dry run
BDTI(G04.2) Request for optional block skip
MBDT1(F04.2) State of optional block skip
SBK(G04.3) Request for single block
MSBK(F04.3) State of single block
OVC(G04.4) Request for override cancel
M01(G06.1) Request for M01 selection
MM01(F04.4) State of M01 selection
ABS(G04.5) Request for manual absolute
MABS(F04.5) State of manual absolute
MLK(G04.7) Request for machine lock

MLK1 (G65.3) Machine lock for the 1st axis
MLK2 (G75.3) Machine lock for the 2nd axis
MLK3 (G85.3) Machine lock for the 3rd axis
MMLK(F04.7) State of machine lock
EDTCHK(F07.1) Signal under checking operation

in edit mode
12 Program CSS(F01.7) Under control of constant driving
status speed
( 01 6)
THRD(F01.6) Screw tapping
RPD(F01.5) Rapid feeding
TAP(F01.4) Tapping
INCH(F01.3) In inch input mode
CUT(F02.1) Under cutting feed
13 Axis travel MV1(F64.2) Moving the 1st axis
status MV2(F68.2) Moving the 2nd axis
MV3(F72.2) Moving the 3rd axis
Axis travel MD1(F64.3) 1st axis direction being moved

direction MD2(F68.3) 2nd axis direction being moved
MD3(F72.3) 3rd axis direction being moved
Inposition INP1(F64.6) 1st axis is in inposition.

INP2(F68.6) 2nd axis is in inposition.
INP3(F72.6) 3rd axis is in inposition.
14 Mode ZRN(G03.0) Request for selecting ref. point return
selection MZRN(F03.0) Ref. point return being selected
H(G03.1) Request for selecting MPG feed
MH(F03.1) MPG feed being selected
J(G03.2) Request for selecting jog feed
MJ(F03.2) Jog feed being selected
D(G03.3) Request for selecting MDI
operation
MD(F03.3) MDI operation being selected
T(G03.4) Request for selecting tape
operation
MT(F03.4) Tape operation being selected
MEM(G03.5) Request for selecting memory
operation
MMEM(F03.5) Memory operation being selected
EDT(G03.6)
(G . ) Request for selecting edit mode
MEDT(F03.6) Edit mode being selected
6-40
2. PLC Diagnosis

15 Reference ZRN(G03.0) Request for selecting ref. point return
point MZRN(F03.0) mode
return Ref. point return mode
Direction of +J1(G65.0) + direction origin of the 1st axis
moving axis -J1(G65.1) - direction
+J2(G75.0) + direction origin of the 2nd axis
-J2(G75.1) - direction
+J3(G85.0) + direction origin of the 3rd axis
Speed ROV2(G06.6) 0 0 1
RT0 RT1 RT2
selection ROV1(G06.5) 0 1 0
Return ZP1(F64.0) Completing ref. point return of the 1st

completed axis
ZP21(F64.1) Completion of the 2nd ref. point return
ZP31(F64.4) Completion of the 3rd ref. point return
ZP41(F64.5) Completion of the 4th ref. point return
ZP2(F68.0) Completing ref. point return of the 1st

axis
ZP42(F68.5)
42( 68 ) Completion
l i off theh 4thh ref.
f point
i return
ZP3(F72.0) Completing ref. point return of the 3rd

axis
ZP43(F72.5) Completion of the 4th ref. point return
Deceleration *DEC1(X00.0) Deceleration signal of the 1st axis

DOG input *DEC2(X00.2) Deceleration signal of the 2nd axis
*DEC3(X00.4) Deceleration signal of the 3rd axis
*DEC4(X00.6) Deceleration signal of the 4th axis
Signal for ADEC1(G65.4) Signal for automatic ref. point return

of the 1st axis
automatic ADEC2(G75.4) Signal for automatic ref. point return
ref. point of the 2nd axis
return ADEC3(G85.4) Signal for automatic ref. point return
of the 3rd axis
16 MPG feed H(G03.1) Request for selecting MPG feed
MH(F03.1) MPG feed being selected
Feed axis HS1A~D(G11.0~3) Selection of MPG1 feed axis

HS1A~D(G11.4~7) Selection of MPG2 feed axis
HS3A~D(G10.0~3) Selection of MPG3 feed axis
Amount of MP2(GO6.3) 0 0 1
LIIx1 LIIx10 LIIx100
movement MP1(G06 2)
MP1(G06.2) 0 1 0
(LII= Least input increment)
6-41

17 Manual J(G03.2) Request for selecting jog feed
continuous MJ(F03.2) Jog feed being selected
feed
Feed axis +J1(G65.0) Request for feeding the 1st axis
to the + direction
+J2(G75.0) Request for feeding the 2nd axis
to the + direction
Speed *JV0~7 (G15) Jog speed selection

selection
Selection of RT(G06.7) Request for selecting rapid feed
rapid feed ROV2(G06.6) 0 0 1
RT0 RT1 RT2
Feed rate ROV1(G06.5) 0 1 0
18 Feed override *FV0~7(G12) Feed override %
MFOC(F06.5) Request for cancelling feed override
OVC(G04.4) Override 100%
ROVC(F46.6) Validation of cancelling feed
override
19 Skip function SKIP1(G00.3) Request for skip 1
SKIP2(G01.5) Request for skip 2
20 External EXRD(G32.1) Signal requesting for starting
input/ external read
output EXPUN(G32.0) Signal requesting for starting
external punch
EXSTP(G32.2) Signal requesting for stopping
external read/punch
RPBSY(F07.4) Singal during external read/punch
External work WN1~128 (G19) Search for external work number

number
Search
External data EIA0~7 (G33) Address signal for external data
input input
EID0~47 Data signal for external data input
(G34~G39)
EISTB(G32.7) Strobe signal for external data input
EIREND(F32.5) Read completion signal for external
data input
ESEND(F07.5) Completion signal for external
search
External data EOA0~7 (F33) Address signal for external data
output output
EOD0~47 Data signal for external data output
(F34~F39)
ERDRQ(G32.6) Signal requesting for external data
output
EOSTB(F32.7) Strobe signal for external data
output
EOREND(G32.5) Read completion signal for external
data output
21 Custom macro UI000~031 Input signal for custom macro
I/F for input (G48~G51) #1032
signal UI100~131 Input signal for custom macro
(G52~G55) #1033
UI200~231 Input signal for custom macro
(G56~G59) #1034
UI300~331 Input signal for custom macro
(G60~G63) #1035
6-42
2. PLC Diagnosis

21 I/F for output UO000~031 Input signal for custom macro
signal (F48~F51) #1132
UO100~131 Input signal for custom macro
(F52~F55) #1133
(F56~F59) #1134
(F60~F63) #1135
22 PLC control EOR00~07 (G66) Cutting rate override
axis ECO 0~2 Instruction for axis control
(in the case (G67.0~G67.2)
of the 1st EIF000~015 Cutting feed rate/spindle
axis) (G68~G69) speed
ED000~031 Axis movement amount/dwell
(G70~G73) time/spindle direction
EBUF1(G67.7) Delivery signal of axis control
EBSY1(F66.7) instruction
Import signal of axis control
instruction
ECLR1(G67.6) PLC control axis reset
ESTP1(G67.5) Break signal of PLC control axis
ESBK1(G67.4) Stop signal of PLC control block
EMSBK1(G67.3) Prohibition signal of block stop
EIAL1(F66.2) PLC control axis alarm
EOTP1(F66.5) + direction signal of overtravel
EOTN1(F66.6) - direction signal of overtravel
PCAX1(G65.5) PLC axis control signal

*SVF1(G64.6) Servo off signal
INP1(F64.6) Inposition signal
MV1(F64.2) Signal under axis movement
23 Tool lifecycle TLCHA(F07.6) Signal requesting for replacing
management tools
TLCHB(F07.7) Completion signal for replacing
tools
TLRST(G10.7) Reset signal for replacing tools
TLSKP(G09.7) Tool skip signal
TL1~64(G9.0~9.6) Tool group signal
Measuring +MIT1(G65.6) X-axis + contact surface of

value of offset measuring value of offset amount
amount -MIT1(G65.7) X-axis - contact surface of
Input signal measuring value of offset amount
+MIT2(G75.6) Z-axis + contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
-MIT2(G75.7) Z-axis - contact surface of
measuring value of offset amount
Signal for TLMI(G08.2) Signal for selecting a mode to
measuring measure tool length
tool TLMO(F02.4) Status signal of the mode to
length measure tool length
MRET(G08.3) Input signal of measuring value
Tool AE1~3 Access signal to measuring position

measurement (G01.2~G01.4)
6-43

24 Chamfering *CHF (G08.0) Requesting for chamfering override
signal
Mirror image MI1 (G65.2) Request for the mirror image of the
signal 1st axis
MI2 (G75.2) Request for the mirror image of the
2nd axis
MI3 (G85.2) Request for the mirror image of the
3rd axis
MMI1 (F65.0) State of the mirror image of the
2nd axis
2st axis
3rd axis
Selecting SYNC1~16 Selection signal of synchronous
synchronous (G17,G16) control
control
Signal under ROTMV (F02.5) State signal under moving rotation
moving axis
rotation axis
25 Handle step HSF00~HSF30 Travel distance of handle feed step
feed (G224.0~G227.6) (pulse)
HSFON (G227.7) Handle feed step in effect
26 Ref.
f Point
i ZRN11 ((G228.0)) Ref.
f point
i return to the
h 1st origin
i i off the
h
return by PLS 1st axis
ZRN12 (G228.1) Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the
1st axis
ZRN13 (G228.2) Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the
1st axis
ZRN14 (G228.3) Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the
1st axis
ZRN21 (G228.4) Ref. point return to the 1st origin of the
2nd axis
ZRN22 (G228.5) Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the
2nd axis
ZRN23 (G228.6) Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the
2nd axis
ZRN24 (G228.7) Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the
2nd axis
ZRN31 (G229.0) Ref. point return to the 1st origin of the 3rd axis
ZRN32 (G229.1) Ref. point return to the 2nd origin of the 3rd axis
ZRN33 (G229.2) Ref. point return to the 3rd origin of the 3rd axis
ZRN34 (G229.3) Ref. point return to the 4th origin of the 3rd axis
27 Work setting PATCR (G236.0) Enter key input
control PATUP (G236.1) Cursor Up input
PATDWN (236.2) Cursor Down input
ASET (G236.3) Setting the screen number indicating
automatic operation
MSET (G236.4) Setting the screen number indicating
non-automatic operation
PT*1~PT*64 Setup data of indicating screen number
(G237.0~G237.6)
PT_A1~PT_AT8 Screen number indicating automatic
(F148) operation
PT_M1~PT_M7
_ _ Screen number indicating g non-automatic
(F149) operation
PDATLD (F151.7) Validation signal for data load
6-44
2. PLC Diagnosis

28 Analog input ANLG10 Analog input data for RAD1 board
~ANLG1B (Channel 1)
(F130.0~F131.3)
ANLG20 Analog input data for RAD1 board
~ANLG2B (Channel 2)
(F132.0~F133.3)
ANLG30 Analog input data for RAD1 board
~ANLG3B (Channel 3)
(F134.0~F135.3)
29 Movement of JGPS01 (G238.0) 1st axis - Movement of the axis
the axis designating the position
designating ED000~ED031 Data to designate the 1st axis position
PLC position (G70.0~G73.7)
JGPS02 (G238.1) 2nd axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position
ED100~ED131 Data to designate the 2nd axis position
(G80.0~G83.7)
JGPS03 (G238.2) 3rd axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position
ED200~ED231 Data to designate the 3rd axis position
(G90.0~G93.7)
JGFN01 (F146.0) 1st axis - Movement of the axis
designating the position completed
JGFN02
G 02 (F146.1)
( 146 1) 2nd
2 d axis
i - Movement off the
h axis
i
JGFN03 (F146.2) 3rd axis - Movement of the axis
30 Macro UINT (G0.2) Starting macro interrupt
interrupt
31 Handle HINT1 (G64.5) Permission of the 1st handle interrupt
interrupt HINT2 (G74.5) Permission of the 2nd handle interrupt
HINT3 (G84.5) Permission of the 3rd handle interrupt
32 Tracing TRMOD (G47.0) Starting tracing function
function NOMCL2 (G47.1) Setting nominal clearance
NOMCL3 (G47.2) Setting nominal clearance
PRECH (F32.0) Nominal clearance state
FAR (F32.1) Far state
COLLIS (F32.2) Collision state
33 Text CAL101~CAL116 Executing calculation of text program 1
calculation (G240.0~G241.7) (O9700)
function CAL201~CAL216 Executing calculation of text program 2
(G242.0~G243.7) (O9701)
CAL301~CAL316 Executing calculation of text program 3
(G244.0~G245.7) (O9702)
(G246.0~G247.7) (O9703)
(G248.0~G249.7) (O9704)
(G250.0~G251.7) (O9705)
(G252.0~G253.7) (O9706)
(G254.0~G255.7) (O9707)
6-45

34 F key KEYF1 (F150.0) F1 key on
condition KEYF2 (F150.1) F2 key on
KEYF3 (F150.2) F3 key on
KEYF9 (F151.1) Screen key on
KEYF10 (F151.2) Select key on
KEYF11 (F151.3) Automatic Start key on
KEYF12 (F151.4) Automatic Stop key on
35 Gas cutting RPRV (F152.1) Origin Reverse key on
operation
key condition RXYCHG (F152.2) X and Y Axes Replace key on
RMIRY (F152.3) Y Axis Mirror Image key on
RMIRX (F152.4) X Axis Mirror Image key on
RPHCAN (F152.5) Preheating Cancel key on
RPRHT (F152.6) Preheating Extend key on
6-46
3. PLC Monitoring Function
3.1 Overview
3. PLC Monitoring Function (PLC Timing Chart Function)

3.1 Overview
PLC monitoring function is used to check the state of mechanical I/O signals.
Ladder diagram shows a specific condition to bring a machine or an NC unit to a
certain state (alarm generation, feed hold, coolant delivery, magazine rotation, tool
clamping, etc.); however, it is usually impossible to know the mechanical I/O
signal at the moment that a condition is given. With this function, it is possible to
know it.
3.2 How to Start Monitoring Function

Select the Diagnosis screen and PLC in general diagnosis, and press the F8
(finger) key to show the MONITOR menu. Press the menu to start the monitoring
function (Fig. 1).
MDI DIAG
Mode
DATA NUM DISP POS Start

TRIGGER
Sampling SETT DISP Cursor

Start ING SLCT Selection
Fig. 1 Time chart screen
Sampling Start ---- When the trigger condition is set, sampling starts.
DISP SLCT ---- Displays the trigger position in such a way to make the
position being 0/29/59 of the scale.
Changes the display position.
SETTING ---- The menus to perform various setups of the timing chart
appear in the case of the operation modes other than
Ref. Point Return and Manual Operation.
DISP SLCT ---- Selects reference cursor.
Selects three options of None Selected, Ref 1, and
Ref 2.
/ ---- Moves to selected cursor position.
---- Displays other diagnosis menus.
6-47
3.3 How to Operate

3.3.1 Condition Setup
MDI DIAG
Mode
Parameter Setting
Display Position Start

DATA NUM
TRIGGER
Number of data
Input Range
DATA CAN-
TRIGGER SETTING
NUM CEL
Fig. 2 Condition Setup (Input the number of data)
First, setup any data necessary for the monitoring function such as address
confirming the operation, trigger, etc. Pressing the Condition Setup in Fig. 1 will
display the menu for data setup (Fig. 2).
1) Press the DATA NUM and input the number of addresses to be checked (1 ~ 8).
When inputting 1 ~ 8 and pressing the Enter key, ch name cursors as many as
specified are generated (Fig. 3).
MDI DIAG
Mode
Parameter Setting

Number of data
TRIG condition
Number of data
DATA SETT CAN-

NUM TRIGGER ING CEL
Fig. 3 Screen after entering the number of data
6-48
3.3 How to Operate
2) Press the Time/Dev menu and enter the unit time (0 ~ 4) .

0 : 10 msec 1 : 50 msec 2 : 100 msec 3 : 500 msec 4 : 1000 msec
Press the Enter key to change the time indication of Time/Dev.
MDI DIAG
Mode
Parameter Setting

Number of data
TRIG condition
Number of data
DATA SETT CAN-

NUM TRIGGER ING CEL
Fig. 4 Time/Dev setup
3) Move the cursor using F4 (up) and F5 (down) keys to setup the addresses to be
checked, and enter all of them (Fig. 5).
MDI Diagnosis
Mode
Parameter Setting

Number of data
TRIG condition
Number of data
Number Trigger Setting Setting

of data Condition Completed Cancelled
Fig. 5 Address input
6-49
4) Press the TRIGGER menu and setup the trigger conditions.

Set the trigger conditions using the ch numbers out of 0 ~ 7, D (Down Edge),
U (Up Edge), L (LOW Level), H (High Level), * (AND condition), and + (OR
condition).
e.g.) 0U: Triggers when the ch0 signal is on
0U+1H: Triggers when the ch0 signal is on or the ch1 is on
0U*1L: Triggers when the ch1 is off and the ch0 signal is on
MDI Diagnosis
Mode
Parameter Setting
DATA NUM Display Position Start
TRIGGER
DATA SETT CAN-

NUM TRIGGER ING CEL
Fig. 6 Input the trigger conditions
5) Memorize the setup data with the SETTING (F6) and cancel the data operated
using Setup Cancelled (F7). Then, when pressing the Finger to the previous data,
the menu INITIAL PARAMETER appears (Fig. 7). Clear the setup data. The setup
data memorized with the Setup Completed (F6) will remain and be continuously
used even when turning the power of the SENTROL2 off.
INITIAL
PARAMETER
Fig. 7 INITIAL PARAMETER menu
6-50
3.3 How to Operate
3.3.2 Sampling
Pressing the SETTING menu will display all of the conditions as shown in Fig. 8.
Pressing the Sampling Start menu will start the sampling operation and change
the menu to that as shown in Fig. 9 while TRIG lights up. It goes on until the
trigger is realized.
When the trigger is realized, the signal as shown in Fig. 10 will be displayed on
the screen.
Press the Stop menu to stop sampling.
MDI DIAG
Mode
TRIGGER
Sampling SETT DISP

Start ING SLCT SELECT
Fig. 8 Sampling start
MDI Diagnosis
Mode

TRIGGER
Stop
Fig. 9 Sampling being executed
6-51
MDI DIAG

TRIGGER
Sampling SETT DISP CURSOR

Fig. 10 Start to display the change state of addresses
3.3.3 Display Selection

Pressing the Display Selection menu will change the display positions in the
order of the start (Fig. 10), the middle (Fig. 11), and the end (Fig. 12).
MDI
Mode DIAG

TRIGGER

Fig. 11 Display of address change state (middle)
6-52
3.3 How to Operate
MDI DIAG
TRIGGER

Fig. 12 Display of address change state (end)
3.3.4 Time Measurement

With the Cursor Select menu, it is possible to select the two horizontal straight
lines indicating the time and move the lines using the F6 (left) and F7 (right) keys.
The time interval of the two lines is displayed on Ref.Time.
MDI DIAG

TRIGGER

Fig. 13 Time measurement
6-53
4. General Diagnosis
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0000 DEC TCS RPI FED RAC FEA RPF INP
DEC 0 : Turn on the limit switch for ref. point return.

1 : Turn off the limit switch for ref. point return.
TCS 0 : Touch sensor off
1 : Touch sensor on
RPI 1 : Zero position being stopped
FED 0 : Feed direction
1 : Feed direction
RAC 1 : Being in ref. point return
REA 1 : Feed active
RPF 1 : Ref. point return completed
INP 1 : Inposition state
0001 MACHINE POSITION
Position of machine coordinates
Unit: Output unit
0002 POSITION ERROR [pulse]
Position variation
Unit: Input unit
0003 COMPENSATION [machine]
Amount of compensation
Unit: Input unit
6-
4.General Diagnosis
0004 ENCODER COUNTER [pulse]
Value of the feedback counter for encoder
Unit: Detection unit
0005 ENCODER CTR SKIP [pulse]
Value of encoder feedback counter latched to skip signal or ENZ
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0006 ENT ENZ ENB ENA
ENT : Encoder touch sensor 1 : ON
ENZ : Encoder zero signal 1 : ON
ENB : Encoder B phase signal
ENA : Encoder A phase signal
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0007 EBL PRD
EBL 1 : Enable on
0 : Enable off
PRD 1 : Power ready on

0 : Power ready off
0008 DA CONVERTER O.P.
DA converter output value
6-
0009 ACTUAL SPEED
Unit: (10mm/min)
0010 DRIFT
Amount of drift compensation

Unit: velo (1velo = 0.31mv)
0011 POSITION LOOP GAIN
Unit: [1/100s]
0012 PULSE COUNTER MISS
Amount of pulse count miss (sign part)

Unit: (PULSE)
0013 ENC 1REV PULSE
Number of pulses generated per one revolution of the encoder (A phase or B phase)
Unit: (PULSE)
0014 SKIP MACHINE POSITION
Machine coordinates when the skip signal is on (unit of internal distribution)
0015 SPINDLE POSITION CODER [pulse]
Value of feedback counter for spindle position coder
0016 SPINDLE POSITION LOOP GAIN
Unit: [1/100s]
6-
4.General Diagnosis
0017 SPINDLE POSITION ERROR [pulse]
Position variation of spindle
Unit: Input unit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0018 SKP MPB MPA
SKP : 0 : Skip signal in

MPB : Phase signal of manual pulse generator B
MPA : Phase signal of manual pulse generator A
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0019 THS BAT 12D 24D EMG ELS
THS : 0 : When the internal temperature sensor of the main unit indicates 70 or
higher
BAT : 0 : When the battery voltage of the backup memory is 2.6V or lower
12D : 0 : When 12V within the main unit is less than 10V due to short circuit,
etc.
4D : 0 : When 24V within the main unit is less than 20V due to short circuit, etc.
EMG : 0 : While pressing down the emergency stop switch
ELS : 0 : When the emergency limit switch is on
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0020 PCZ PCB PCA
PCZ : 1 : Spindle position coder zero signal is on.

PCB : 1 : Phase signal of the spindle position coder B is on.
PCA : 1 : Phase signal of the spindle position coder A is on.
6-
0021 SYNC POSERR DIFF
SLAVE MASTER . (2BYTE DATA)
: (PULSE)
0022 SYNC POS CORRECTION
.
SLAVE DATA . (2BYTE DATA)
: 0.305mV
0023 SYNC TORQUE DIFF
SLAVE MASTER TORQUEMONITOR .(2BYTE DATA)
: 4.88mV
0024 SYNC SHIFT VALUE
SHIFT .
SLAVE DATA . (2BYTE DATA)
: (PULSE)
0025 SYNC GRID SHIFT DIFF
GRID SHIFT .
PARAMETER 1817 UR6 = 1 . . (4BYTE DATA)
: (PULSE)
6-
1. Parameter Setting
1.1 Parameter Setting Method
Chapter 7 Parameter
1. Parameter Setting
1.1 Parameter setting method
Turn KEY on the OPRT PANL screen to set the parameters.
The PARA METR screen consists of SETTING screen (Fig. 7-1) and SERV
PARA screen (Fig. 7-2).
MDI PARA SET- RELA O1111 MDI PARA SERV RELA O1111
METR TING TIVE N00000 - METR PARA TVE N00000
PAGE 1/23
No.0000 0000 EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC
TV CHECK 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON)
TVC (CONTROL OUT)
0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON)
..... .....
RT2 S.BLK RT2 S.BLK
NO.
) )
NO.
Figure 7-1 (Screen Example) Figure 7-2 (Screen Example)
1) Operational parameter setting method

Turn on the key on the OPRT PANL and select PARAMETR screen in modes
other than zero return and manual operation. If the SETTING screen does not
appear, press the KEY and then SETTING key.
F-key functions are as below. Move the cursor onto the parameter to set and enter
the set value. The operational parameter is set.
No. Sets the parameter No.
Moves the cursor up/down.
Moves screen by screen.
) Displays the NEXT menu.
7-1
Chapter 7 Parameter
2) Service parameter setting method

Turn on the KEY on the OPRT PANL screen and select the PARA METR screen
in MDI mode. If the SERV PARA screen does not appear, press the key and
then SERV PARA key. Using F-key shown below, move the cursor onto the
parameter to set and then enter the set value using the number key.
Press NO. key and enter the parameter number to search the parameter number
(Temporary input)
If the wrong number is entered, press Back Space key and enter the number
again. To cancel all the numbers that have been temporarily entered, press the
CANCEL key. Press Key to set the entered number.
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right.
Note 1) Each setting parameter has the range available to set the value.
Note 2) NEXT MENU mentioned above is as shown below. With this menu,
various setting screens can be selected.
SET-
TING
MAC
RO
SERV
PARA
PTCH
ERR
IN
PUT
OUT
PUT )
Note 3) Parameters of SENTROL are commonly displayed on the screen for all
models regardless of models for lathe or milling. Therefore, In the following
2. Parameter List of SENTROL2 section, each parameter is classified as
follows:
1. (L) : Parameter available only for SENTROL2-L (for lathe)

2. (M) : Parameter available only for SENTROL2-M (for milling)
3. No Symbol : Parameter available for entire SENTROL2 models
4. (For Laser Cutter) : Parameter available only for laser cutter
5. (For Laser Scriber) : Parameter available only for laser scriber
For both laser cutter and laser scriber, parameters of SENTROL-M are
used together with such parameters described in 4 and 5.
6. (For Angular grinder) : Parameter available only for angular grinder
These parameters are used together with the parameters of SENTROL2-L.
7-2
1. Parameter setting
1.1 Parameter Setting Method
3) Pitch error compensation parameter setting method

Turn on the KEY on the OPRT PANL and then select the PARA METR screen
in MDI mode.
If the PITCH ERR screen does not appear, press the key and then PITCH
ERR.
Using the F-key shown below and move the cursor onto the parameter to set and
enter the setting value with the numeric key.
Press the NO. key and enter the parameter number. This enables to search the
parameter number.
(Temporary input)
If the wrong number is entered, press Back Space key and enter the
number again.
To cancel all the numbers that have been temporarily entered, press the CANCEL
key. Press Key to create the entered number.
Setting Range : 127 ~ 127
Moves the cursor up/down/left/right.
a) Overview of stored pitch error compensation function

With this function, the pitch error can be compensated for each axis by
minimum distance unit. (Note that it is valid only after zero return is
performed.) After the zero return, set the tool position as compensation basis.
And set the compensation value as parameter in offset interval set for each
axis.
(1) Compensatible axis: all axes (rotational axis is also compensatible.)
(2) Compensation point: maximum total of 640 points for all axes
Maximum 256 points per axis.
(3) Compensation range
Per compensation point : 127 ~ 127
Compensation unit is determined according to diameter or radius setting.
b) Parameter setting
Pitch error parameters are set by the following parameter number.
(1) Pitch error compensation point No. for origin point (each axis) ----------
parameter No. 5420
(2) Pitch error compensation point No. for the most (-) side (each axis) ----
parameter No. 5421
(3) Pitch error compensation point No. for the most (+) side (each axis) ----
parameter No. 5422
(4) Pitch error compensation point interval (each axis) -------------------
parameter No. 1813
Pitch error compensation point has the limit for the minimum value, and
is determined by the following formula.
Minimum interval value = Maximum speed / 12000 (unit: mm, deg)
7-3
Chapter 7 Parameter
Ex.) For the maximum speed of 1200mm/min, the minimum value is

1mm.
(5) Pitch error compensation amount is - set by corresponding to each pitch
error compensation point number (parameter No. 3000 ~ 3639).
c) Example of parameter setting
(1) Linear axis
Pitch error (absolute value)
Origin point direction

direction
0 +2 0 -1 0 +1 +2 -1 -2 -2 -1 +2
3099 3098 3097 3096 3095 3094 3093 3092 3091 3090 3089 3088 Amount for
each axis
Parameter No.
Compensation interval: 10000,
Compensation point: In case of 100, parameter is set as follows:
Pitch error compensation point for origin point NO.5420 = 95
Pitch error compensation point for (-) direction NO.5421 = 0
Pitch error compensation point for (+) direction NO.5422 = 99
Pitch error compensation interval NO.1813 = 10000
For the compensation value, pitch error compensation value (incremental
value) between intervals is set.
Note ) parameter number should be set to increase in () direction.
(2) Rotational axis (parameter 1814REV = 1)

Compensation interval and point should be satisfied with the following
conditions.
360000 = compensation interval compensation point
Total of compensation amount per 1 rotation should be set to be 0.
Pitch error (absolute value)

direction

0deg. 360deg.
Origin point Amount for each axis
0 +2 -2 -1 -1 +2 +2 -1 -2 +1
3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308 3309 Parameter No.
Compensation interval: 3600, Compensation point: In case of 10,

parameter is set as follows:
Pitch error compensation point for origin point NO.5420 = 300

Pitch error compensation point for (-) direction NO.5421 = 300
Pitch error compensation point for (+) direction NO.5422 = 309
Pitch error compensation interval NO.1813 = 36000
7-4
2. SENTROL2 PARAMETER
2. SENTROL2 PARAMETER LIST

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0000 DC3 %OF ARC EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC
DC3 1: For program output, output the DC3 signal after DATA output is complete.
0: For program output, do not output the DC3 signal after DATA output is complete.
%OF 1: For program input, start the input with the CR signal.
0: For program input, start the input with the % + CR signal.
ARC 1 : Use C and R for the address in chamfering and corner radius.
0 : Use I , K and R for the address in chamfering and corner radius.
Use ,C and ,R for any angle chamfering and corner radius.
EIA 1 : Punch code is EIA.
0 : Punch code is ISO.
NCR 1 : In ISO code, end of block code is punched as LF.
0 : In ISO code, end of block code is punched as LF CR CR.
ISP 1 : ISO code contains no parity bit.
0 : ISO code contains a parity bit.
CTV 1 : TV check is not performed during control out.
0 : TV check is performed during control out.
TVC 1 : TV check is performed
0 : TV check is not performed.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0011 SOF SBO SBC SBM D24 TMR ND8 NE8
SOF 1 : Use FANUC 10/11 tape format.

0 : Use FANUC 0 tape format.
SBO 1 : Single block stop is performed in blocks which are automatically generated in NC to
correct tool nose radius compensation.
0 : Single block stop is not performed.
SBC 1 : Single block stop is performed in each canned cycle.
0 : Single block stop is not performed in each canned cycle.
SBM 1 : Single block stop is performed in custom macro statement.
0 : Single block stop is not performed in custom macro statement.
D24 1 : DC2 and DC4 code are output when data is output through RS232C port.
0 : DC2 and DC4 code are not output when data is output through RS232C port
TMR 1 : Timer (cycle time) is cleared after execution of M00 or M01.
0 : Timer (cycle time) is not cleared after execution of M00 or M01.
ND8 1 : O8000~O8999 programs are not displayed on the CRT while they are executed
0 : O8000~O8999 programs are displayed on the CRT while they are executed.
7-5
Chapter 7 Parameter
NE8 1 : O8000~O8999 programs can be edited.

0 : O8000~O8999 programs cannot be edited.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SCL MIR
0012
(M)
SCL 1 : Scaling is valid (for each axis)
0 : Scaling is not valid (for each axis)
MIR 1 : Mirror image ON (MIRROR)
0 : Mirror image OFF (NORMAL)
0020 FOREGROUNG INPUT
Specify which interface is used for foreground input device.

0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1 (COM1)
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2 (COM2)
0021 FOREGROUND OUTPUT
Specify which interface is used for foreground output device.

0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1 (COM1)
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2 (COM2)
0022 EXTERNAL INPUT
Specify which interface is used for input device to control external I/O device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2
0023 EXTERNAL OUTPUT
Specify which interface is used for external device to control external I/O device.
0 : RS232C INTERFACE 1
1 : RS232C/RS422 INTERFACE 2
0032 AUTO INCREMENT
Specify the increment value of sequence number when using the Automatic Sequence No. Generation Function.
Data rang: 1 ~ 127
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1000 RV1 RVM DRO RAB NCE ROS CSZ
RV1 1: When assigning the rotary axis, return to the origin after making one revolution.
0: When assigning the rotary axis, return to the origin without making one revolution.
RVM 1: When assigning the rotary axis, move to the - direction.
0: When assigning the rotary axis, move to the + direction.
7-6
DRO 1: Make the DIGITAL READ OUT valid.

0: Make the DIGITAL READ OUT invalid.
RAB 1: When assigning the rotary axis, indicate with absolute coordinates.
0: When assigning the rotary axis, do not indicate with absolute coordinates.
NCE 1 : The servo enable signal is not checked at servo ready check. Set1 when using an axis as
index table or with servo off function.
0 : The servo enable signal is checked at servo ready check (standard)
ROS 0 : The machine coordinate system for stroke check and automatic reference point return is
rotary axis type.
1 : The machine coordinate system for system for stroke check and
automatic reference point return is linear axis type.
CSZ Not used
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1004 RV- RV+ IRP RVS
RV- 1: When designating the rotation axis, always move in the - direction.
0: When designating the rotation axis, do not move in the - direction at all times.
RV+ 1: When designating the rotation axis, always move in the + direction.
0: When designating the rotation axis, do not move in the + direction at all times.
IRP 1: The unit to be entered for each axis should be 10-fold.
0: The unit to be entered for each axis should not be 10-fold.
RVS 1: When designating the rotation axis, move to the shortest distance.
0: Follow the values of RV- and RV+.
RV- and RV+ are valid if RVS is 0 and invalid if it is set as 1.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1005 RMB PLC PND DCI ZNG PLZ ALZ
RMB 1 : Controlled axis detach of each axis is available.

0 : Controlled axis detach of each axis is not available.
PLC 1 : Each axis is controlled by PLC.
0 : Each axis is not controlled by PLC.
PND 1 : Position data is not displayed on the screen.
0 : Position data is displayed on the screen.
DCI 1 : Each axis is decelerated when deceleration signal of reference point return changes to 1 (high).
0 : Each axis is decelerated when deceleration signal of reference point return changes to 0 (low).
ZNG 1 : Each axiss machine lock is valid.
0 : Each axiss machine lock is invalid.
PLZ 1 : Work coordinate system is always preset when manual reference point return is completed.
0 : Work coordinate system is preset only at the first manual reference point return
7-7
Chapter 7 Parameter
ALZ 1 : Automatic reference point return (G28) uses the same sequence as manual reference point return
0 : Automatic reference point return (G28) is performed by positioning control (rapid traverse)
1020 NAME OF EACH AXIS
Assign a program axis name to each control axis according to the next table.
Axis name Set value Axis name Set value Axis name Set value
X 88 A 65 U 85
Y 89 B 66 V 86
Z 90 C 67 W 87
1030 2 ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Assign an address among A,B,C,U,V and W to be Address Set value

Used for 2nd auxiliary function according to the
A 65
Next table. Note that the address used as a control
Axis name cannot be assigned as the address of the B 66
2nd auxiliary function. C 67
1031 STANDARD AXIS

The units of the parameters common to all axes such as dry run rate vary according to the specified
increment systems. This parameter is employed to refer to the units of these parameters as those of an
increment system of the standard axis in case of that the specified increment system is different for
each axis. Specify the sequence number of the axis which is used as the standard axis.
note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
1032 RELATES AXIS TO BCS

Assign each control axis to basic coordinate system according to the next table.
Set value Meaning

0 A rotary axis
1 X axis of basic three axes
2 Y axis of basic three axes
3 Z axis of basic three axes
5 An axis parallel to X axis
6 An axis parallel to Y axis
7 An axis parallel to Z axis
7-8
1034 LINEAR AXIS FOR POLAR

Specify the control axis number of rotary axis for polar coordinate interpolation
Data range : 1~8 note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
1035 ROTARY AXIS FOR POLAR

Specify the control axis number of rotary for polar coordinate interpolation.
Data range : 1~5. note)Refer to parameter 1020 for the numbers of the control axis.
(ANGULAR
1040 ANGLE OF SLOPE AXIS
GRINDING)
Specify the angle of X axis for the sloped axis control.
Data range : -60000~-20000, 20000~60000 Data unit : 0.001deg
Default set : 30000
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SDW SAD OSS QTL
1041 RPS OSL AGL
(C) (C) (C) (C)
RPS 1: At reference point finish and G92 coordinate setting the relative coordinate is established
with the same value as the absolute coordinate.
0: At reference point return finish and G92 coordinate setting the relative coordinate is not
established with the same value as the absolute coordinat.
OSL 1: The OSCILLATION function (G81.1) is valid.
0: The OSCILLATION function (G81.1) is invalid.
SDW 1: Slow up/down (automatic Acceleration/deceleration) function for water jet is valid.
0: Slow up/down (automatic Acceleration/deceleration) function for water jet is invalid.
SAD 1: Spindle Acceleration/deceleration (feed override) function is valid for blanket quilting
machine.
It is used to control spindle override in PLC.
Set acceleration/deceleration section to parameter 613,6616.
Setting unit: 0.1mm
Set low speed clamp value to parameter 6610.
Setting unit: 1%
0: Spindle acceleration/deceleration (feed override) function is invalid for blanket quilting
machine.
OSS 1: The OSCILLATION acceleration/deceleration type is Sin Curve.
0: The OSCILLATION acceleration/deceleration type is linear.
QTL 1: The embroidery function is valid.
(for G94, start operation at the rising edge of the INTERLOCK signal)
0: The embroidery function is invalid.
AGL 1 : Sloped axis control is performed for each axis.
(For angular grinder)
0 : Sloped axis control is not performed for each axis.
7-9
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SAP MPV SPB EON SOV
1042 CPS
(SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN) (SPIN)
SAP 1: All Sample Data are saved.

0: To make the Data components (X, Z movement distance) between Samples identical,
combine them into one Data and Count Up the Counter.
MPV 1: Manage the Teaching Data vis--vis the Position Data.
0: Manage the Teaching Data vis--vis VCmd.
SPB 1: If SAP=0, the Sample Data that was Counted Up is prepared in the number of Blocks equal
to the number counted.
0: If SAP=0, the Sample Data that was Counted Up is prepared in 1 Block.
EON 1: During SERVO OFF, the Enable signal is turned ON.
0: During SERVO OFF, the Enable signal is OFF.
SOV 1: The SERVO OFF function is valid.
0: The SERVO OFF function is invalid.
CPS 1: In chopping MODE, automatic stop is rendered invalid.
0: In chopping MODE, automatic stop is rendered valid.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GTF
1043 PST
(SPIN)
PST Not used (reserved)
GTF 1: The GAIN CONSTANT TABLE is valid.
0: The GAIN CONSTANT TABLE is invalid.
1044 SAMPLING TIMES (SPIN)

The sampling period for the NC Interrupt period is set up.
Sampling period [ms] = NC Interrupt period (10ms) SAMPLING TIMES
Setup value: 0 ~ 100
1220 WORK ZERO COMMON
This parameter gives the offset value common to all of the work coordinate system.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis (in millimeter) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data unit : -99999999~+99999999
7-10
1221 WORK ZERO SFT #1
Work zero point offset values are established for work coordinate system 1 through 6(G54~G59)
according to these parameters.
Increme
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis (in millimeters) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis (in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Setup value: -99999999~+99999999
1240 VALUE OF 1 ST R POINT
1241 VALUE OF 2 ST R POINT
1242 VALUE OF 3 RD R POINT
1243 VALUE OF 4 TH R POINT
The coordinate values of the 1st through 4th reference point are established in the machine coordinate
system according to these parameters.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis(in
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
millimeters)
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~+99999999
7-11
Chapter 7 Parameter
1260 MOVEMENT OF ROTARY
Set the movement amount of one rotation of a rotary axis. For use of the axis as a rotary axis establish
this parameter without fail.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : 0~99999999
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
COR LAI F05 FST SKF LRP TDR RDR
1400
(M)
COR 1: Feed clamp function by radius of circular arc is valid.

In this case, automatic corner override function is not available.
0: Feed clamp function by radius of circular arc is invalid.
LAI 1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is valid.
0 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interporation is invalid.
The acc./dec. time is set in parameter 1622.
Data range : 10 ~ 100 Unit : msec
F05 1 : In case the feedrate is selected on the soft operators panel for speeds.
0 :Override value increases by 5%
Override value increases by 10%
FST 1 : Feed stop function is valid.
0 : Feed stop function is invalid.
SKF 1 : Feedrate of skip function is decided by the parameter(data #1428)
0 : Feedrate of skip function is decided by F code commanded on the program
*Note) This parameter is valid only when the parameter #7200 HSS is set to 0. And the
PLC-NC interface signal (SKIP 1~4) is used as the skip signal.
LRP 1 : Linear interpolation type positiong (G00). Tool path is always straight line.
0 : Non-linear interpolation type positioning (G00). Independent rapid traverse for each axis
is performed.
TDR 1 : Dry run is valid for thread cutting command and tapping command.
0 : Dry run is invalid for thread cutting command and tapping command.
RDR 1 : Dry run speed is valid at rapid traverse in dry run mode.
0 : Dry run speed is not valid at rapid traverse (but rapid traverse speed).
7-12
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADC ACF TRA RP4 TR8 MR2 CAL
1401
(C) (C) (C) (C) (C)
ADC 1 : Automatic acc./dec. function is valid.

0 : Automatic acc./dec. function is valid.
ACF 1 : Actual feedrate output at F12,F13 is valid.
0 : Actual feedrate output at F12,F13 is invalid.
TRA 1 : Tracing function is valid. (LASER CUTTING)
0 : Tracing function is invalid. (LASER CUTTING)
RP4 1 : Manual rapid traverse rate before ref.p.return finish is carried out at set value.
0 : Manual rapid traverse rate before ref.p.return finish is carried out at 1/4 of the set value.
TR8 1: The 8CH TRACING FUNCTION is valid (for the LASER cutter).
0: The 8CH TRACING FUNCTION is invalid (for the LASER cutter).
MR2 1 : Manual rapid traverse rate is carried out at 1/2 of the set value.
0 : Manual rapid traverse rate is carried out at the set value.
CAL 1 : The special hight sensor correction function is valid
0 : The special hight sensor correction function is not valid
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1402 JF2 CRD RTF --- RF0 SMC ROV RAT
JF2 1: FEED OVERRIDE type JOG feed is used.

0: FEED OVERRIDE type JOG feed is not used.
CRD 1: As for automatic chamfer/corner R, it is possible with no decimal point used in C and R.
0: As for automatic chamfer/corner R, it is impossible with no decimal point used in C and R.
RTF 1: In the RETURN function, move at feed rate.
0: In the RETURN function, move at DRY RUN speed.
RF0 1: Stop with rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE 0.
0: Do not stop with rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE 0.
SMC 1: Rapid traverse from manual operation feed conversion (G6.7) is carried out smoothly.
0: Rapid traverse from manual operation feed conversion (G6.7) is carried out in the existing
manner.
ROV 1: The rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE is rendered valid (valid only for 1400 LPR=0).
0: The rapid traverse FEED OVERRIDE is rendered invalid.
RAT 1: The rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration TYPE is set to the exponential type.
0: The rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration TYPE is set to the linear type.
7-13
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1403 RDA
RDA 1: The rapid traverse rate selection count is 4 (RT0~RT3).
0: The rapid traverse rate selection count is 3 (RT0~RT2).
1413 EACH AXIS MAX HANDLE FEED

CLAMP speed for each axis of handle operation
Setup value: 0~32767
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 mm/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 deg/min
1414 N OF HANDLE FEED 1
The magnifications are established for the manual pulse generator according to this
Parameter,
Setup value: 1~200
1422 EACH AXIS MAX FEEDRATE
The maximum feedrate is set for each axis according to this parameter.
Data unit : see next table.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Setup value: 1~6000
7-14
1428 SKIP FUNCTION FEEDRATE
Skip function (G31) feedrate is established according to this parameter.

This parameter is valid only the parameter #1400 SKF is set to 1.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
1494 REVERSE FEED RATE (C)

Set up the feed rate for RETRACE function REVERSE.
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Setup value : 1~32767
1500 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE 0
Specify rapid traverse rate(RT0~RT2) for each axis.

Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Setup value: 1~9800

(for the I TYPE, 1~12000 distribution cycle 8ms and 1~24000 distribution
Cycle 4ms for high-speed machining)
7-15
Chapter 7 Parameter
1503 JOG FEED RATE

: :
1523 JOG FEED RATE
Specify the steps of jog federate. They are common to all of axes.
The maximum federate(Vmax) can be calculated as following,
Vmax(mm/min) = Maximum motor speed(rpm)Axis moving distance per a revolution(mm)
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
1524 EACH AXIS JOG FEED RATE
Set up the JOG feed rate for each axis (valid only when No.1402 JF2 =1, however).
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
For each axis, set up rapid traverse rate RT3 (valid only when No.1403 RDA=1, however).
Content is the same as 1500~1502.
7-16
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1601 OVB -
OVB 1: The Block Overlap function is used.

0: The Block Overlap function is not used.
1620 TIME CONSTANT (RAPID)
Linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant is established for

each axis according to this parameter.
Data range : 0~1000 Data unit : msec
speed (rapid traverse)
Rapid
traverse
rate
FL rate
time
Acc./dec.
Time constant
1621 FL (RAPID)
Linear type rapid traverse accleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Data range : 0~32767
1622 TIME CONSTANT (FEED)
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration(exponential type) time constant is established for each axis

SPEED (FEED, JOG, THREAD CUTTING)
FL SPEED
TIME
ACC./DEC.
TIME
7-17
Chapter 7 Parameter
1623 FL (FEED)
Feed acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter. 0
should be set in this parameter, otherwise the correct straight line or arcshapes cannot be obtained.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
1624 TIME CONSTANT (JOG)
Jogging acceleration/deceleration (exponential type) time constant is established for each axis
according to this parameter.
1625 FL (JOG)
Jogging acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
1626 TIME CONSTANT (THREAD)

Tread cutting acceleration/deceleration time constant is established for each axis according to this
parameter.
1627 FL (THREAD)
Thread cutting acceleration FL rate is established for each axis according to this parameter.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
1628 TIME CONSTANT (OSCILLATION)

For each axis, set up the time constant for the OSCILLATION function acceleration/deceleration (refer
to the parameter NO.1622 figure).
Setup value: 0~4000 Unit: ms
7-18
1629 FL (OSCILLATION)
For each axis, set up the FL speed for the OSCILLATION function acceleration/deceleration (refer to
the parameter NO.1622 figure).
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
1630 TIME CONSTANT (MARKING)

For each axis, set up the time constant for the MARKING feed acceleration/deceleration (refer to the
parameter NO.1622 figure).
1631 FL (MARKING)
For each axis, set up the FL speed for the MARKING feed acceleration/deceleration (refer to the
parameter NO.1622 figure).
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 Mm/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 Deg/min
1632 TIME CONSTANT A (RAPID)

For each axis, set up the time constant for the rapid traverse BELL type acceleration/deceleration
(linear); refer to the parameter NO.1633 figure.
1633 TIME CONSTANT S (RAPID)

For each axis, set up the time constant for the rapid traverse BELL type acceleration/deceleration (curve).
Velocity
Ts/2 Ts/2 Time(msec)
Ta
7-19
Chapter 7 Parameter
1800 SERVO AXIS NO.

Relates each control axis to a servo axis. Normally, set the same value as the control axis sequence
number to the servo axis number.
If a same servo axis number is set to more than 2 control axes, the largest control axis becomes valid.
Data range : 0~8(1~3, 5~7 : servo axis I/F, 4,8 : spindle I/F)
Setting example 1. Lathe (2 servo axes (X and Z)+spindle)

1800 X 1
Z 2
C 4 (spindle)
Setting example 2. Milling (3 servo axes (X, Y and Z)+spindle)
1800 X 1
Y 2
Z 3
C 4 (spindle)
Setting example 3. Machining center (7 servo axes (X, Y, Z, A, U, V and W)+spindle)
1800 X 1
Y 2
Z 3
A 4
U 5
V 6
W 7
C 8 (spindle)
1817 A URO 1 (1 is set if the spindle I/F is used as servo axis I/F.)
1801 ENCODER TYPE
Set the number of pulses per pulse coder rotation for each axis.
Data range : 100~25000 Data unit : PPR
1802 MOVING MULTIPLY
Set the machine movement per motor rotation for each aixs.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.001 deg
7-20
1803 POSITION LOOP GAIN
Position control loop gain is specified for each axis. For a machine which performs linear or circular
interpolation cut, specify the same value for all of the axes. For a machine which only requires
positioning, different values may be specified for different axes. The larger the loop gain, the higher
the position control response. But if it is too large, the servo system becomes unstable.
Data range : 500~10000 Data unit : 0.01/sec Default value : 3000
1804 STOP POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value at stop is specified for each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the
limit value when the axis movement stops, a servo alarm occurs and the machine stops instantly
Data range : 100 ~ 5000 Data unit : Detection unit
1805 MOVING POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value during axis movement is specified for each axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the limit value while moving, a servo alarm occurs
And the machine stops instantly.
Rapid Trav.(mm/min.) ENCODER PULSE(PPR) 2
ERROR LIMIT= 1.2
PITCH(mm/rev) PISITION LOOP GAIN(1/s) 60
Data range : 100~25000 Data unit : Detection unit
1806 SERVO OFF POS ERR LIMIT
Position deviation limit value at servo off is specified for each axis.
Data range : 100~5000 Data unit : Detection unit
1807 GAIN CONSTANT
Specify the velocity command voltage to rotate the servo motor at 1000rpm.
For example, if the servo motor rotates at 1000rpm with 4 volt, set 4000.
Data range : 1000 ~ 8000 Data unit : mV/1000rpm Default set : 3500
1808 INPOSITION WIDTH
In-position width is specified for each axis. If the deviation of the machine position from the command
position is less than the in-position width, it is assumed that the machine has reached the command
position or is in-positioned.
Data range : 1 ~ 100 Data unit : Detection unit
7-21
Chapter 7 Parameter
1809 RPR FEED LOW
Feedrate(FL) after deceleration in reference point return is established for each axis according to this
parameter.
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
1810 RP SHIFT AMOUNT
Specify the grid shift amount for each axis.

Data range : -25000 ~ 25000 Data unit : Detection unit
1811 BACK LASH COMPEN

Specify the backlash compensation amount for each axis. After power is turned on, the first backlash
compensation is performed when an axis moves in the direction opposite to the reference point return
direction.
Data range : 0 ~ 32767
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
1812 SERVO OFF DELAY TIME
Specify the delay time of servo system to be set off when emergency stop switch was pushed. This
parameter is used to keep the heavy weighted axis from dropping by turning off the servo system after
the brake holds the axis.
Data range : 0 ~ 127 Data unit : 10ms
1813 PITCH INTERVAL
Specify the compensation intervals at pitch error compensation of each axis.

Data range : -99999999~99999999
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
7-22
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1814 MAG HSP RET RDI REV MRW ISF ISR
MAG 1 : Each axiss control axis detach signal is valid.

0 : Each axiss control axis detach signal is invalid.
HSP 1 : High speed positioning is performed. In this case, parameter #1825 must be set properly.
RET 1: After the reference point return deceleration, the direction of movement is reversed if Z
pulse is received.
0: After the reference point return deceleration, the direction of movement is not reversed
even if Z pulse is received.
0 : High speed positioning is not performed.
RDI 1 : Reference point return direction is - axis direction for each axis.
0 : Reference point return direction is + axis direction for each axis.
REV 1 : Specify as rotary axis for each axis.
0 : Specity as non-rotary axis for each axis.
MRW : Servo motor rotates in one direction..
ISF ISF ISR Least command increment Abbreviation
ISR 0 0 0.001mm, 0.001deg IS-B
0 1 0.01mm, 0.01deg IS-A
1 0 0.0001mm, 0.0001deg IS-C
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1815 SAC OHC VOC F1C SOC
SAC 1 : Cancel next alarms : over load, over heat, encoder disconnection, voltage alarm, V ready
ON/OFF, over current. Diagnosis 0010 EBL, PRD display 1 but PREADY ENABLE
signal does not display 1.
0 : Next alarms are not canceled : over load, over heat, encoder disconnection, voltage alarm,
V-ready ON/OFF, over current.
OHC 1 : Motor overheat cancel function is valid.
0 : Motor overheat cancel function is invalid.
VOC 1 : V READY ON/OFF check cancel function is valid.
0 : V READY ON/OFF check cancel function is invalid.
F1C 1 : Encoder feedback counter check cancel function is valid.
0 : Encoder feedback counter check cancel function is invalid.
SGM 1 : Use YASKAWA SIGMA SERIES SERVO DRIVE/MOTOR.
Can be displayed SERVO ALARM
0 : Do not use YASKAWA SIGMA SERIES SERVO DRIVE/MOTOR
SOC 1 : Servo off error check cancel function is valid.
0 : Servo off error check cancel function is invalid.
7-23
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1816 EMH AVO EVF MPS M10 ACP VRA ALB
EMH 1 : The function is 100 times as valid as encoder pulse setting value.
The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type is 0.01PPR.
If this function is valid, the setting unit of parameter 1802 is also 1/100.
0 : The function is 100 times as invalid as encoder pulse setting value.
The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type is 0.01PPR.
AVO 1 : EPS3 analog voltage output function is valid.
0 : EPS3 analog voltage output function is invalid.
EVF 1 : Follow up is valid with servo OFF. (mechanical handle used)
0 : Follow up is invalid with servo OFF.
MPS 1 : Machine origin point shift function is valid.
0 : Machine origin point shift function is invalid
M10 1 : The unit of parameter 1802 MOVING MULTIPLY is multiplied by 10.
0 : The unit of parameter 1802 MOVING MULTIPLY is not multiplied by 10.
ACP 1 : SERVO ALARM, ENCODER DISCONECT and V-READY ON/OFF ALARM are not
checked, when P-READY signal is off.
0 : SERVO ALARM, ENCODER DISCONECT and V-READY ON/OFF ALARM are
checked, when P-READY signal is off.
VRA 1 : V READY signal is normally open contact.
0 : V READY signal is normally closed contact.
ALB 1 : V READY signal is A contact.
0 : SERVO ALRAM signal is B contact.
Standard setting value for difference servo units.
SERVO UNIT ACP VRA ALB

1 YASKAWA SIGMA/ SIGMA SERIES 0 1 0
FDA-5001~04 1
2 LG FDA-5000 SERIES 1 0
FDA-5005~45 0
3 PANASONIC MINAS SERIES 0 1 0
7-24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1817 UR7 UR6 UR5 UR4 UR3 UR2 UR1 UR0
UR7 1st axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR 14004 and 14007 are ignored.
2nd axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR-related DATA is displayed.
3rd axis 1: The Time Chart function is segmented.
4th axis 1: LAN TYPE DNC is operated.
5th axis 1: Interrupt SYSTEM ERROR 13000~ is ignored.
UR6 1: During simple synchronization control, the Grid Shift is synchronized as well.
0: During simple synchronization control, the Grid Shift is not synchronized.
UR5 1 : Change meaning of parameter 1810. 10 times or 100 times is determined according to
1816 M10 or 1817 UR2.
(Valid up to 1000 times in case of 9090 DB6 = 1)
0 : Do not change meaning of parameter 1810.
UR4 1 : Change meaning of parameter 1816.
(Valid only in case of 1816 M10=1 and 1817 UR2=1)
Setting unit of moving multiply: 1000 times
UR3 1 : Use absolute encoder.
0 : Do not use absolute encoder.
UR2 1 : Change meaning of parameter 1810.
UR1 1 : Cs axis is valid. (Valid only in case of UR0 = 1)
0 : Cs axis is invalid.
UR0 1 : Use spindle I/F as servo axis.
0 : Do not use spindle I/F as servo axis.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
GCT
1818 DPF MDR NDR
(SPIN)
DPF 1: The DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function is valid.
0: The DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function is invalid.
GCT 1: This is used as the target axis of the GAIN CONSTANT TABLE.
0: This is not used as the target axis of the GAIN CONSTANT TABLE.
MDR 1: The shortest distance selection function for the reference point return without reference
point DOG is valid.
0: The shortest distance selection function for the reference point return without reference
point DOG is invalid.
NDR 1: The reference point return function without reference point DOG is valid.
0: The reference point return function without reference point DOG is invalid.
7-25
Chapter 7 Parameter
1821 FEED FORWARD GAIN
Specify the feed forward gain constant.

1822 DRIFT AMOUNT
Specify drift compensation amount for each axis when the parameter #1823 ADF is set to 0.
Data range : -2000~2000 Data unit : velo(1velo=0.31mv)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADF DIA AUG ERC P1O
1823
(L)
ADF 1 : Automatic drift compensation is performed.

0 : Automatic drift compensation is not performed.
DIA 1 : Each axis movement amount is specified by diameter.
0 : Each axis movement amount is specified by radius.
AUG 1 : Automatic gain compensation is performed.
0 : Automatic gain compensation is not performed.
ERC 1 : Reference point is lost by emergency stop on.
0 : Reference point is not lost by emergency stop on.
P10 1 : The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type increases to 10 times.
0 : The setting unit of parameter 1801 encoder type does not increases to 10 times.
1824 ZERO PULSE WIDTH
Specify the encoders zero width signal for each axis.

Data unit : Detection unit Data range : 0~50
How to find out the set value : Set the parameter #1824=0 first of all and turn off the power. Turn on
the power again, make a reference point return. Then DIAG 0012 will display some values while an
axis moves and also display the different value when the axis move direction changes. Find the
maximum value of DIAG 0012 and set the absolute value of that maximum value to this parameter.
example) YASKAWA SIGMA, HYOSUNG YASKAWA AC SERVO :4
LG AC SERVO, PANASONIC MINAS AC SERVO :4
7-26
1825 GAIN CHANGE POS ERR
Specify the maximum amount of position error VCMC
when high speed positioning is executed

Data unit : Detection unit Data range : 0~25000 HIGH SPEED POSITIONING
This parameter is invalid when parameter NORMAL POSITIONING
1814 HSP is set to 0. POSITION ERROR

-POSERR +POSERR
INCLINATION TWICE AS BIG
POSITION ERROR/VCMD GRAPH
1826 F/B PULSE CHECK DATA
When power is turned on, servo motor rotates as mush as set in this parameter to check if feedback
pulse is generated normally.
When this parameter is set to 0, feedback pulse check sepuence is not performed. Set 0 for those
motors which have brake system, they cannot perform the check sequence normally.
Data unit : Detection unit Data range : -500 ~ 500 Default set : 50
1827 BACK LASH MAX LIMIT

Set the maximum limit of backlash compensation amount for each axis. If the value exceeds the
maximum limit, divide the backlash compensation amount and perform the setup. (It the amount is 0,
set to 256 according to previous standard.)
Setting value: 0~256
Increment system
Axis type
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
1828 ELECTRONIC GEAR (NUMERATOR)

Set up the numerator (A) for the gear ratio. This is used if the rotary axis or GEAR ratio is a fractional
value.
Setup value: 0~99999999 4byte data
1829 ELECTRONIC GEAR (DENOMINATOR)

Set up the denominator (B) for the gear ratio. This is used if the rotary axis or GEAR ratio is a
fractional value.
Setup value: 0~99999999 4byte data
The gear ratio range must satisfy the following: 0.01<= A/B <= 100.
7-27
Chapter 7 Parameter
1832 FEED STOP POSITION
Specify feedstop position deviation for each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the feedstop position
deviation while moving, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration controls are temporarily
stopped.
When the position deviation becomes less than the feedstop position deviation, the pulse distribution
and acceleration/deceleration controls are restarted.
Data unit : Detection unit Data range : 0~32767
1833 CLAMP VOLTAGE

Set up the control value for the hydraulic Servo minimum speed Clamp.
Setup value: 0~32767 Unit: Detection unit (PULSE)
1834 2ND INPOSITION WIDTH

G00 in-position check value if inplevel=6 from G code C64.1
Setup value: 0~32767 Unit: Detection unit (PULSE)
1841 GAIN CONSTANT TABLE 1 (SPIN)

GAIN CONSTANT value for each axis
Select the TABLE number with the following 4 bits: G262.0~G262.3.
Setup value: 1000 ~ 65535
7-28
1860 BL ACCEL VALUE
Set the acceleration amount of the backlash acceleration function.

Data unit : 3.05mV Data range : 0~4095 Default set : 0
1861 BL ACCEL TIME
Set the accelerating time of backlash acceleration function.

Data unit : msec(10msec) Data range : 0~127 Default set : 0
1862 BL ACCEL STOP
Set the move amount of the backlash acceleration function at acceleration stop. Acceleration will stop
if the move amount after direction change exceeds this value.
Data unit : pulse Data range : 0~127 Default set : 0
1863 BL ACCEL VALUE 2

Acceleration value for backlash acceleration function is set. (Direction moves from + to -. )
Setting to 0 invalidates the function.
Setting Unit: 3.05mV Setting value: 0 ~ 4095 Standard value: 0
1870 DUAL POS FB IN

Set up the ENCODER Input PORT for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP used in DUAL POSITION
FEEDBACK with the control axis number.
For example, to connect the detector for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP in the X axis (first axis) to the
fifth axis, set the 1870 parameter to 5.
An 8-axis NC may be set to 8, and a 16-axis NC, to 16.
Set the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function to 0 when not in use.
Setup range: 0~16
1871 DUAL POS FB A
1872 DUAL POS FB B

In the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK function, set up the ratio for converting the separate placement-
type detector signal used in the FULLY CLOSED LOOP to a unit for the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP
detector in the numerator (1871) and the denominator (1872).
Ex.) If the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP unit is 0.00025 mm, and the FULLY-CLOSED LOOP unit, 0.001
mm, the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP and the FULLY CLOSED LOOP generate 4000 pulses and 1000
pulses, respectively, when moving 1 mm.
Since A/B = 4000/1000, set up as A (1871) = 4, B (1872) = 1.
Any one side set to 0 is treated as a 1:1 ratio.
7-29
Chapter 7 Parameter
1873 DUAL POS FB TC
For the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the time constant of the first order lag
system for error compensation.
If set to 32767, the time constant becomes infinite, and compensation does not occur.
Setup unit: mm Setup range: 0~32767 Standard value: 10000
1874 DUAL POS ZERO WIDTH<?>
For the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the compensation override range.
If the difference between FEEDBACK from the FULLY CLOSED LOOP and FEEDBACK from the
SEMI-CLOSED LOOP is lower than the setup value, compensation is not executed.
Setup unit: Detection unit for the SEMI-CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: 0~32767 Standard value: 10
1875 CLOSED LOOP REF COUNTER
When using the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, the REFERENCE COUNTER value
for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP is set up for each axis.
Setup unit: Detection unit for FULLY CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: 0~32767 Standard value: 10
1876 CLOSED LOOP RP SHIFT
When using the DUAL POSITION FEEDBACK control function, set up the origin GRID SHIFT
amount of each axis for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP.
To SHIFT the GRID position, set up the GRID SHIFT amount.
If the DATA sign is , the GRID will SHIFT in the direction; if the DATA sign is , the GRID
will SHIFT in the - direction. The GRID SHIFT amount cannot exceed the REFERENCE COUNTER
value of 1875.
Setup unit: Detection unit for the FULLY CLOSED LOOP
Setup range: -32767~32767 Standard value: 0
7-30
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2000 OPS STR
OPS 1 : Cycle operating signal is turned on when searching for a sequence number.
0 : Cycle operating signal is not turned on when searching for a sequence number.
STR 1 : Cycle start lamp signal is output when programs are loaded by cycle start signal in part
program edit mode. (refer to parameter #2200 RDS)
0 : Cycle start lamp signal is not output when programs are loaded by cycle start signal in
part program mode.(refer to parameter #2200 RDS)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2001 EDT MMC SWD DLO MNL RAM LWS SQC
EDT 1 : Use background I/O function ( SOFT DKU ).

0 : Do not use background I/O function ( SOFT DKU ).
MMC 1: Multiple M-codes in one block can be commanded(max.4)
0: Only one M-codes command per block is allowed.
SWD 1 : Servo feedback graphic display screen can be selected.
0 : Servo feedback graphic display screen cannot be selected.
DLO 1 : Display the spindle load on machine operator panel.
0 : Display the spindle load on the screen.
MNL 1 : Output signal is forced to output by manual operation in PLC diagnostic display.
0 : Output signal is not forced to output by manual operation in PLC diagnostic display.
RAM 1 : PLC SEQUENCE as written in RAM is valid(RAM operation)
0 : PLC SEQUENCE as written in ROM is valid(no RAM operation)
LWS 1: During SEQUENCE COMPILE, the LOW LEVEL partition is valid.
0: During SEQUENCE COMPILE, the LOW LEVEL partition is invalid.
SQC 1 : PLC sequence editing on screen is possible.
0 : PLC sequence editing on screen is not possible.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2003 BSN TSN SSN MSN
BSN 1 : Minus sign - can be used in the second auxiliary function.

0 : Minus sign - cannot be used in the second auxiliary function.
TSN 1 : Minus sign - can be used in T code
0 : Minus sign - cannot be used in T code.
SSN 1 : Minus sign - can be used in S code.
0 : Minus sign - cannot be used in S code.
MSN 1 : Minus sign - can be used in M code.
0 : Minus sign - cannot be used in M code.
7-31
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2004 OF7 OF6 OF5 OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 HOB
OF7 1 : Contents of F7 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CLNT CAN) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F7 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CLNT CAN) is
displayed.
OF6 1 : Contents of F6 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CLNT CAN) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F6 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CLNT CAN) is
displayed.
OF5 1 : Contents of F5 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch M01) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F5 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch M01) is displayed.
OF4 1 : Contents of F4 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch SNGL BLOK) is
not displayed.
0 : Contents of F4 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch SNGL BLOK) is
displayed.
OF3 1 : Contents of F3 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch OPT.SKIP) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F3 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch OPT.SKIP) is
displayed.
OF2 1 : Contents of F2 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch DRY RUN) is not
displayed.
0 : Contents of F2 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch DRY RUN) is
displayed.
OF1 1 : Contents of F1 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CHIP CONV) is
not displayed.
0 : Contents of F1 soft key on the program screen (soft op.panel switch CHIP CONV) is
displayed.
HOB 1 : Gear ratio of the spindle position coder is 2:75(for hobbing m/c)
0 : Gear ratio of the spindle position coder is 1:1
7-32
2020 OP PANEL PLUS BUTTON
Specify the operators panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual feed positive(+)
direction on the software operators panel.
Data unit : Integer Data range : 0~9
2021 OP PANEL RPR BUTTON
Specify the operators panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual reference point
return direction on the software operators panel.
2030 ALLOWABLE DIGITS M
2031 ALLOWABLE DIGITS S
2032 ALLOWABLE DIGITS T
2033 ALLOWABLE DIGITS 2ND
Specify the allowable digits in the M,S,T and the second auxiliary function code.
2034 FEED OVERRIDE STEP
Specify the max. number of step for the feed override/jog feed bar display.
Data range : 0~21 Standard setting : SOFT OP PANEL : 21 HARD OP PANEL : 15
2049 WORK NO. SEARCH METHOD
When set value is 0 to 99 : External work number search is done only in those program numbers
whose higher two digits is same as the set value.
When set value is less than 0 or larger than 99 : External work number search is done ignoring the
higher two digits of the program number.
If there are more than one program found, they are searched by registered order.
Data range : -127~127
7-33
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2200 DGD RDS PAL NM9 NPE RAL REP RDL
DGD 1 : In DNC mode the graphic menu is displayed.

0 : In DNC mode the graphic menu is not displayed.
RDS 1 : The register of programs by cycle start signal under part program edit mode is valid.
0 : The register of programs by cycle start signal under part program edit mode is invalid.
PAL 1 : All programs are punched out when punching the program with external I/O device
control.
0 : A single program is punched out when punching the program with external I/O device
control.
NM9 1 : M99 is not assumed as the program end when programs are loaded.
0 : M99 is assumed as the program end when programs are loaded.
NPE 1 : M02, M30 and M99 should not be assumed as program end when programs are loaded.
0 : M02, M30 and M99 should be assumed as program end when programs are loaded.
RAL 1 : All programs are registered when registering the program with external I/O devices
control or with cycle start signal.
0 : A single program is registered when registering the program with external I/O devices
control or with cycle start signal.
REP 1 : If the program with the same program number as the already loaded program is loaded,
the already loaded program is deleted first, then the attempted program is loaded.
0 : If the program with the same program number as the already loaded program is loaded,
an alarm is indicated.
RDL 1 : Previously loaded programs are deleted and programs are loaded when programs are
loaded by external I/O control.
0 : Programs are loaded without deleting the previously loaded programs when programs are
loaded by external I/O control.
7-34
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2201 HSC DEL LSP MRH ND9 NE9 PDR
HSC 1 : High speed canned cycle is valid.

0 : High speed canned cycle is invalid.
DEL 1 : The cancel menu on the program list in edit mode is not displayed.
0 : The cancel menu on the program list in edit mode is displayed.
LSP 1 : Restrict editing program with not less than 5 MB.
0 : Do not restrict editing program with not less than 5 MB
MRH 1 : (Total running time) value can be changed.
0 : (Total running time)value cannot be changed.
ND9 1 : Programs O9000~O9999 are mot displayed during execution.
0 : Programs O9000~O9999 are displayed during execution.
NE9 1 : Programs O9000~O9999 cannot be edited.
0 : Programs O9000~O9999 can be edited.
PDR 1 : At power on the program table will be displayed as a programming screen.
0 : At power on the last program will be displayed as a programming screen.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2202 MSD DTL HCH MBL
MSD 1 : CYCLE TIME is displayed in seconds.

0 : CYCLE TIME is displayed in units of 10msec.
DTL 1 : Absolute coordinate position is displayed with not tool length(tool pos.) offset.
0 : Absolute coordinate position is displayed with tool length(tool pos.) offset.
HCH 1 : AUTO program displayed appears in a small letter.

0 : AUTO program displayed appears in a big letter.
MBL 1 : Set the number of previously translated program block to 100.
0 : Set the number of previously translated program block to 4.
7-35
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2203 COL TCC RC2 RC1 RC0 TC2 TC1 TC0
COL TCC COLOR Display Method

Change the COLOR and display the cutting processing path each time a tool is
1 1
replaced.
0 1 The tool path is displayed using a COLOR between TC0~2.
The rapid traverse and cutting feed are displayed using a COLOR between RC0~2
1 0
and TC0~2, respectively.
0 0 Change the COLOR and display the path each time a tool is replaced.
RC2 RC1 RC0 COLOR

0 0 0 YELLOW
0 0 1 RED
0 1 0 GREEN
0 1 1 WHITE
1 0 0 CYAN
1 0 1 MAGENTA
1 1 0 BLUE
1 1 1 BLACK
TC2 TC1 TC0 COLOR

0 0 0 YELLOW
0 0 1 RED
0 1 0 GREEN
0 1 1 WHITE
1 0 0 CYAN
1 0 1 MAGENTA
1 1 0 BLUE
1 1 1 BLACK
Note) If TCC=1, the first COLOR after POWER ON is a COLOR between TC0~2.
Each time tool replacement occurs, the COLOR changes according to the order in the table. For
example, when starting with GREEN, the succeeding COLOR is WHITE, CYAN, and MAGENTA. In
this case, however, BLACK is ignored, and YELLOW follows BLUE.
2210 PARAMETER DISPLAY AXIS
Specify the number of axes to display the parameter data.

Data range : 1~8
2211 POSITION DISPLAY AXIS
Specify the number of axes to display the position data.

Data range : 1~8
7-36
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DPF GSC GSB DWL
2400 DPQ SCA DPI
[L] (L) (L)
DPF 1: Recognize Feed that has been commanded without a decimal point as 1 mm/min unit.
0: Recognize as an input unit.
GSC GSB G CODE SELECTION

0 0 G CODE SYSTEM A
0 1 G CODE SYSTEM B
1 0 G CODE SYSTEM C
DWL 1 : Dwell(G94) is dwell in second in the feed per minute mode(G94) or dwell in revolution in
the feed per revolution mode(G95)
0 : Dwell(G04) is always dwell in second.
DPQ 1: With the G32 command issued, process the decimal point for Q Address.
0: The decimal point cannot be used. The internal unit is 0.001deg.
SCA 1: In case of thread cutting, the starting angle is assigned in 0.001deg units.
0: In case of thread cutting, the starting angle is assigned in 1deg units.
DPI 1 : Decimal point is entered by calculator method.
0 : Decimal point is entered by conventional method.
Command Calculator method Conventional method

X1000 1000 mm 1 mm
X1000. 1000 mm 1000 mm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2401 G64 NCM G18 G95 G90 G01
G64 Not used

NCM 1 : The next modal information is not cleared by reset.
0 : The next modal information is cleared by reset.
G00~G03, G17~G19, G43~G49, G54~G59, G90~G91,
G93~G95, G96~G97, F, H, S, T code.
G18 1 : G18(ZX plane) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G17(XY plane) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G95 1 : G95(feed per revolution) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G94(feed per minute) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G90 1 : G90(absolute) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G91(incremental) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
G01 1 : G01(linear interpolation) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
0 : G00(rapid traverse) mode is entered when power is turned on or when the system is cleared.
7-37
Chapter 7 Parameter
2410 ARC RADIUS ERROR
Specify a limit value as difference between start point radius and end point radius for circular
interpolation command.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Millimeter system 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Data range : 0~99999999
2426 WORK COUNT UP M CODE

Allow the M code that COUNTS UP the number of work pieces to be set up.
Setup value: 0~97
2900 DOUBLE TURRETS DISTANCE (L)
When mirror image for double turrets function is used, specify the distance between the double turrets.
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Millimeter system 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Data range : -99999999 ~ +99999999
5001 IO I/F NO. (RS232C 1)
Specify the I/O device number to be connected to the RS 232C interface 1. Set the device
specifications corresponding to I/O device number 1 to 6 in parameter 5110~5162.
Data range : 1~6
5002 IO I/F NO. (RS232C 2)
Same as 5001
5110 DEVICE NUMBER 1
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 1. The relationships
between specifications numbers and I/O devices are follows:
Spec.No I/O device specifications

1 Use control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch a feed
2 Use no control codes (DC1~DC4) and punch a feed
3 Use control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch no feed
4 Use no control codes(DC1~DC4) and punch no feed
Data range : 1~4
7-38
5111 STOP BITS 1
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 1.
Data range : 1~2
5112 BAUD RATE 1
Specify the baud rate of I/O device corresponding with device number 1.
The relationship between set value and I/O device is as follows;
Set value BAUD RATE (BPS)
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
12 19200
13 38400
Specify the specification number of I/O device corresponding to device number 2.

Data range : 1~4
5121 STOP BITS 2
Data range : 1~2
5122 BAUD RATE 2
Data range : 8~13

Data range : 1~4
5131 STOP BITS 3
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 3
Data range : 1~2
5132 BAUD RATE 3
Data range : 8~13
7-39
Chapter 7 Parameter

Data range : 1~4
5141 STOP BITS 4
Specify the number of stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 4
Data range : 1~2
5142 BAUD RATE 4
Data range : 8~13

Data range : 1~4
5151 STOP BITS 5
Specify the number stop bits of I/O device corresponding with device number 5.
Data range : 1~2
5152 BAUD RATE 5
Specify the baud rate I/O device corresponding with device number 5.
Data range : 8~13

Data range : 1~4
5161 STOP BITS 6
Data range : 1~2
5162 BAUD RATE 6
Data range : 8~13
7-40
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OUT
5200 POT PCO
(L)
POT 1: For G2.7 signal, converting the forbidden area is validated.

0: For G2.7 signal, converting the forbidden area is invalidated.
PCO 1 : Check soft over limit travel in advance before the movement.
0 : Do not check soft over limit travel in advance before the movement.
OUT 1 : Exterior is inhibited area for stored stroke limit 3.
0 : Interior is inhibited area for stored stroke limit 3.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5210 OT1 OT3 OT2
OT1 1: STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 is not checked for each axis.

0: STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 is checked for each axis.
OT3 1 : Stored stroke limit 3 is checked for each axis.
0 : Stored stroke limit 3 is not checked for each axis.
OT2 1 : Stored stroke limit 2 is checked for each axis.
0 : Stored stroke limit 2 is not checked for each axis.
5220 STROKE LIMIT 1 VALUE
Specify stored stroke limit 1 positive(+) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
Specify stored stroke limit 1 negative (-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
7-41
Chapter 7 Parameter
Specify stored stroke limit 2 positive coordinate value in machine coordinate system for each axis
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999

Specify stored stroke limit 2 negative(-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
5224 STROKE LIMIT 3 VALUE (L)
Specify stored limit 3 positive(+) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for each
axis.
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
5225 STROKE LIMIT 3 VALUE (L)
Specify stored stroke limit 3 negative (-) direction coordinate value in machine coordinate system for
each axis.
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -99999999~99999999
7-42
5226 STROKE LIMIT 1_2 VALUE

If G2.7 is 1, set up the + direction coordinate values for the STORED STROKE LIMIT 1_2 for each
axis.
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Deg
Setup value: -99999999~99999999
5227 STROKE LIMIT 1_2 VALUE

If G2.7 is 1, set up the - direction coordinate values for STORED STROKE LIMIT 1 for each axis.
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Setup value: -99999999~99999999
5420 PITCH ERROR OF R POINT

Specify the pitch error compensation point number corresponding to reference point of each axis.
Data range : 0~639
5421 PITCH ERROR NEAREST

Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the - end of each axis.
Data range : 0~639
5422 PITCH ERROR NEAREST

Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the + end of each axis.
Data range : 0 ~ 639
7-43
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PDC P20 RPR MDR PDR PP1 PP0 RSC
5603
(L)
PDC 1 : Disconnection of position coder is not detected.
0 : Disconnection of position coder is detected.
P20 1 : Spindle position coder for lathe(for feed/rev.calc.) is 2000PPR type.
0 : Spindle position coder for lathe(for feed/rev.calc.) is 1024PPR type.
RPR 1 : When starting rigid tapping operation, spindle orientation is not performed first.
0 : When starting rigid tapping operation, spindle orientation is performed first
MDR 1 : When the analog speed command for spindle is +voltage, spindle turns CCW.
0 : When the analog speed command for spindle is +voltage, spindle turns CW. By changing
this parameter from 0->1 for 1->0 the necessary spindle rotation direction for rigid tapping
separation can be matched easily
PDR 1 : Spindle position coder pulse direction for CW spindle rotation is CCW.
0 : Spindle position coder pulse direction for CW spindle rotation is CW.
PP1, PP0 Select the right pulse per rotation
PP1 PP0 No. of pulse
Setting for the rigid tapping pos. 0 0 256PPR
Coder according the right table. 0 1 512PPR
1 0 1024PPR
1 1 2048PPR
RSC 1 : The constant surface speed control in rapid traverse(G00) is calculated based on the
position at the end point of the block.
0 : The constant surface speed control in rapid traverse(G00) is calculated based on the
current position of the tool.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IDM IOR
5605 AN2 AN1
(L) (L)
AN2 1 : ANALOG output2(PNC2 #2)is valid

0 : ANALOG output2(PNC2 #2)is invalid
AN1 1 : ANALOG output1(PNC2 #1)is valid.
0 : ANALOG output1(PNC2 #1)is invalid.
IDM 1 : Positioning direction for spindle positioning M-code is minus.
0 : Positioning direction for spindle positioning M-code is plus.
IOR 1 : Spindle positioning mode is not cancelled by spindle pos. reset.
0 : Spindle positioning mode is cancelled by spindle pos. reset.
7-44
5614 SPINDLE GAIN ADJUSTMENT
Set the position loop gain for spindle and Z-axis at rigid tapping.
Data range : 0~4000 Unit : 0.01/SEC
5615 SPINDLE ORIENT SPEED
Set the position shift amount for spindle orientation at rigid tapping operation start.
Data range : 10~500 Unit : rpm
5616 SPINDLE RP SHIFT
Set the position shift amount for spindle orientation at rigid tapping operation start.
Data range : 0~4095 Unit : Detection Unit
5640 CONST SURFACE SPEED CTRL
Specify the axis number for the constant surface speed control.
Data range : 0~3
* If 0 is set, constant surface speed control is performed on the X axis.
5680 M SPINDLE ORIENTATION
Set M code for spindle orientation command.

Data range : 6~97
5681 M CANCEL POSITIONING
Specify the M-code number, which cancels the spindle orientation and establishes normal spindle
speed control mode.
Data range : 6~97
5682 M SPINDLE POSITIONING BY M
Specify the initial M-code of the spindle positioning by M-code function. Thus 6 M-code will be
established, starting with the M-code of parameter 5682, whereby the initial M-code brings about a
spindle positioning of the basic rotation angle of parameter 5683 and the all calculated from the
orientation 0-point.
Data range : 6~92
5683 BASIC ROTATION ANGLE
Specify the basic rotation angle for the spindle positioning by M-code function.
Data range : 1~60 Unit : DEG
7-45
Chapter 7 Parameter
5691 SRVO GAIN LOOP (GEAR1)
Set the spindle gain constant for rigid tapping Gain constant in the command voltage at 1000rpm
spindle rotation.
EX) In case the command volta
ge for 6000rpm(max.)
10 1000 / 6000 = 1666
Data range : 0~9999 Unit : mV
5692 SPIDLE GAIN LOOP (GEAR2)
5751 TIME CONSTANT (RIGID GR1)
Set the spindle and Z-axis acceleration/deceleration time for rigid tapping.
Data range : 10~1270 Unit : msec
Spindle speed
S MAX
(Parameter
No.5766)
Time
Acc./D
ec. time
5752 STOP POS ERR LIMIT

Set the allowable position error for spindle stop in rigid tapping mode. An alarm is issued when the
position error amount exceeds this limit.
Data range : 10~4000 Unit : Detection unit standard setting : 500
7-46
5754 MOVING POS ERROR LIMIT

Set the allowable spindle moving position error for rigid tapping.
An alarm is issued and the spindle stops when the position amount exceeds that limit during rigid
tapping.
The set value is calculated as below :
Set value = 1.2 s N 4 / (G 60)
Whereby S : max. spindle rpm during rigid tapping
N : No. of pulse per spindle rotation (before the NC calculates them internally times 4)
G : Spindle rotation loop gain.
Data range : 100~25000 Unit : Detection unit
5755 INPOSITION WIDTH
Set the imposition width of the spindle for rigid tapping. If the difference between spindle position and
command position is smaller than the imposition width, the spindle is regarded as having reached the
command position.
Data range : 0~127 Unit : Detection unit Standard setting : 20
5756 BACKLASH COMPEN
Set the spindle backlash compensation amount for rigid tapping.

Data range : 0~127 Unit : Detection unit
5757 M RIGID TAPPING
Specify the M-code that command rigid tapping mode.

Data range : 0~127 Standard setting : 29
5758 TAP RETURN RPM
Set rpm during rigid tapping return.

Setting value: 0~10000 Standard value : 0 (invalid)

Refer to 5751.
Refer to 5751.
Refer to 5751.
7-47
Chapter 7 Parameter
5766 S MAX SPEED (RIGID GR1)
Specify the maximum spindle RPM for rigid tapping

Data range : 0~4000 Unit : RPM
5770 MANUAL RIGID TAP LEAD (M)
Set up the manual RIGID TAPPING LEAD

Setup value: -32767~32767; Unit : 0.001mm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OFH LWM LD1 LVK LXY PC1 PNH EVO
6000
(M) (L) (L) (M) (M) (M)
OFH 1 : H is used for tool radius offset.

0 : D is used for tool radius offset.
LWM Not used
LD1 1 : The tool offset number is specified by low order one digit of the T code.
0 : The tool offset number is specified by low order two digits of the T code.
LVK 1 : The tool offset vector is maintained without being cleared by reset.
0 : The tool offset vector is cleared by reset.
LXY 1 : The axis, where G43, G44 tool length offset applies can be freely assigned in the parts
program.
0 : The axis, to where G43, G44 tool length offset applies, is always the Z-axis
PC1 1 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is valid for circular commands.
0 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is not valid for circular commands
PNH 1 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is commanded by H code.
0 : Tool offset(G45~G48) is commanded by D code.
EVO 1 : When the offset value is changed, the new offset value is effective from the next block
which is loaded in buffer register.
0 : When the offset value is changed, the new offset value is effective from
7-48
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DRZ CNI LGC LGN LWT LGT CNC CSU
6001
(M) (L) (L) (L) (L)
DRZ 1 : For dry run mode the data of parameter 6223 is added to the tool length offset
amount(add. Offset shift function)
0 : For dry run mode the data of parameter 6223 is not added to the tool length offset
amount(add. Offset shift function).
CNI 1 : Interference check is not performed for tool nose radius compensation.
0 : Interference check is performed for tool nose radius compensation.
LGC 1 : Both wear and geometry offsets are canceled when tool number 0 is specified with
parameter LGN=0 (wear offset number and geometry offset number are common).
0 : Wear offset is canceled while geometry offset is not canceled when tool number 0 is
specified with parameter LGN=0 (wear offset number and geometry offset number is
common)
LGN 1 : Lower 2 or 1 digit of T code specifies wear offset number and tool number digit(s) (3rd
digit or 2nd and higher digits of T code) specifies geometry offset number.
0 : Lower 2 or 2 digit of T code specifies geometry and wear offset numbers commonly.
LWT 1 : Tool wear offset is done by moving the tool.
0 : Tool wear offset is done by shifting work coordinate system.
LGT 1 : Tool geometry offset is done by moving the tool.
0 : Tool geometry offset is done by shifting work coordinate system.
CNC 1 : An alarm is not indicated when the programmed movement direction and the offset
movement direction differ by 90 to 270 degree in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42).
0 : An alarm is indicated when the programmed movement direction and the offset
movement direction differ by 90 to 270 degree in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42).
CSU 1 : B type is used for the start up type in tool nose R compensation(G41, G42)
0 : A type is used for the start up type in tool nose R compensation(G41,G42)
7-49
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMB OD2 OD1 OHS OFE ORC
6002 K40
(L) (L) (L)
TMB 1 : B function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset(tool setter)
0 : A function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset(absolute).
OD2, OD1 : Specify the maximum number of the tool offset data.
OD2 OD1 No. of Data(L) No. of Data(M)

0 0 32 32
0 1 64 99
1 0 94 200
OHS In case direct input of measured tool offset function B in used(TMB=1) :

1 : High speed skip signal is not used when B function is performed for direct measured tool
offset(TMB=1).
0 : High speed skip signal is used when B function is performed for direct input of measured
tool offset(TMB=1).
OFE 1 : The tool path at the graphic tool path display is shown without calculation of tool length
offset(M) or tool position offset(L).
0 : The tool path at the graphic tool path display is shown including the calculation of tool
length offset(M) or tool position offset(L).
ORC 1 : Tool offset value is specified by radius value.
0 : Tool offset value is specified by diameter value.
K40 1: Even if cutter compensation cancellation is commanded following circular interpolation,
ALARM 121 will not be generated.
0: If cutter compensation cancellation is commanded following circular interpolation, ALARM
121 will be generated.
6015 TOUCH SENSOR X (Xp) (L)
6016 TOUCH SENSOR X (Xm) (L)
6017 TOUCH SENSOR Z (Zp) (L)
6018 TOUCH SENSOR Z (Zm) (L)
These parameters are referred to when B function is performed for direct input of measured tool offset.
Specify the distance from the measurement standard point to the contact face of sensor. For the
diameter designated axis, set in diameter value.
7-50
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Data range : -99999999~99999999

6019 TOOL LENGTH BIAS (M)
Specify the difference(bias amount) between tool and table surface for tool length offset input through
the PLC I/F
Data range : -999999~999999 Standard setting : 0
6020 LASER ON INTERVAL (LASER SCRIBER)

Not used
6021 DRY RUN Z OFFSET

OFFSET amount for the OFFSET function of the Z axis during a DRY RUN
Setup Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
mm type machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Setup value: 0~ +99999999
6100 CLEARANCE 1 (LASER CUTTING)

Standard setting : 1000
6101 CREARANCE 2 (LASER CUTTING)

6102 CREARANCE 3 (LASER CUTTING)

Specify the value for nominal clearance 1,2,3 for the tracing function clearance 1,2 or 3 is selected by
PLC-NC interface signals.
Data range : 0~32767 Standard unit : 0.001mm
6103 COMP. TIME 1 (LASER CUTTING)

7-51
Chapter 7 Parameter
6104 COMP. TIME 2 (LASER CUTTING)

Specify a motor control offset time, which will then be valid after the collision(=tracing) signal goes
to high(=ON). Within this specified time the motor will no move. The motor elevates the axis only if
the signal stays high longer than the specified time. Time 1 is valid when clearance 1 or 2 are selected,
time 2 is valid when clearance 3 is selected.
Data range : 0~32767 Standard unit : msec
6105 THRESHOLD (LASER CUTTING)

Specify the threshold value for output of the position reached signal.
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : 0.001mm Standard setting : 1000
6106 MEASURING RANGE (LASER CUTTING)

Specify the distance between work and nozzle at which the sensor outputs exactly 10V
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : 0.001mm Standard setting : 10000
6110 GAIN P (LASER CUTTING)
Set the proportional gain for tracing operation.

6111 GAIN I (LASER CUTTING)
Set the integral gain for tracing operating.

6112 GAIN D (LASER CUTTING)
Set the differential gain for tracing operating.

6113 INPOSITION WIDTH CUT (LASER CUTTING)
Establish the allowable in-position error value for the automatic edge showdown function.
Data range : 0~25000 Unit : Detection unit(PULSE)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TMD TRD TRE
6115
(C) (C) (C)
TMD 1: The TRACING function clearance display and Macro variable are assigned (#5840).
0: The TRACING function clearance display and Macro variable are not assigned (#5840).
TRD 1: The TRACING function Motor direction is inverted.
0: The TRACING function Motor direction is not inverted.
TRE 1: The TRACING function is valid.
0: The TRACING function is invalid.
7-52
6116 TRACING A/D INPUT NO (for a LASER cutter)

Set up the channel number for the ANALOG input used in the TRACING function.
Parameter setup range for each axis: 0 ~ 127
If it is 0, the TRACING function is invalid.
If 1ch for RAD1 is used for the second axis, set the second axis to 1.
If two ANALOG inputs and n, m channels are used, set up the value for the n10+m values.
6117 TRACING P GAIN (for LASER cutter)

Set up the proportional GAIN for the TRACING function for each axis.
Setup range: 0 32767 setup
6120 CORNER ANGLE (LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, if the C-axis distance exceeds the setting value, tool moves
up(M50) or down(M51).
Data range : 0 127 Unit : 1DEG
6121 ADVANCE (LASER CUTTING)
Set tool width offset amount in C-axis tool direction control function.
Data range : 0 32767 Unit : 0.01mm
6122 OVERCUT (LASER CUTTING)
Set overcut amount in C-axis tool direction control function.

6123 CORNER ADVANCE (LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, set tool width offset amount if the tool moves up or down at
the corner.
6124 CORNER OVERCUT (LASER CUTTING)
In C-axis tool direction control function, set overcut amount if the tool moves up or down at the corner.
(CLOTH
6125 MAX DISTANCE
CUTTING)
In cutter C-axis tool direction control function, set the maximum continuous cutting distance.
Data range : 0~32767 Unit : 0.01mm
7-53
Chapter 7 Parameter
(CLOTH
6126 M17 LARGE ADVANCE
CUTTING)
In cutter C-axis tool direction control function, set advance amount during M17 large advance.
6130 M02 REPEAT VALUE (C)
Set repeated value by M02 code.

Data range : 0~99
6131 KERF VALUE (C)
Set processing kerf width of gas cutter. (Specification B)

6132 GAS CUTTING FEED (C)
Set processing cutting speed of gas cutter. (Specification B)

Data range : 0~32767 Unit : mm/min
6133 FEED DOWN SIGNAL LEVEL (C)

Set up the speed limit at which the gas cutter will output a signal that the cutting speed has dropped
(Specification B).
Setup value: 0~25000 Unit: mm/min
6134 FEED DOWN LEVEL (1/100%) (C)

Set up the speed limit at which the gas cutter will output the signal that cutting speed has dropped.
The FEED DOWN signal (F153.6) is turned ON when parameter number 6133 is 0 and if 6134
contains a value by comparing the % for the assigned FEED.
Setup value: 0~10000 Unit: 1/100%
6154 SPINDLE ZERO OFFSET
Set zero offset of D/A converter for spindle.

Data range : -32767 ~ 32767
6170 ROUGH GRIND POWER (G)
Set target grinding force for roughing. The maximum spindle grinding force should be set to 100%.
Data range : 1~100 Unit : 1 %
7-54
6171 FINISH GRIND POWER (G)
Set target grinding force for threading.

The maximum spindle grinding force should be set to 100%.
Data range : 1~100 Unit : 1 %
6172 GAIN KC (G)
Set gain for finishing force control is set.
6173 COMPENSATION TYPE (G)
Set compensation type of grinding stone. The maximum axis grinding force should be set to 100%
Data range : 0~2
0
Target grinding Target value of
Force grinding force
1
2
current initial
6174 CONYTOL M CODE (G)
Set the first number of the 4 M codes, which is used in finishing force control function.
Adding the above number to offset amount creates M code for each control function. There are no M
flags from M code used in finishing force control function.
Data range : 0~127
6175 GRIND POWER DI (G)

Set up the address of the Digital input for entering the grinding force used in finish grinding force
control.
If the value is, the grinding force input for the usual specification is rendered valid.
Use analog input for EPS4 if 9010<ES4>=1.
If 9010<ES4>=0 and 9013<AD1>=1, use the analog input for CHI for RAD1.
Setup range: 0 ~ 499
7-55
Chapter 7 Parameter
6176 FULL POWER VOLTAGE (G)

Voltage parameters for 100% grinding force (main axis load)
Setup range: 0 ~ 127 Unit: %
6177 POWER FILTER CONSTANT (G)

Low Pass Filter for finish grinding force.
Setup range: 0 ~ 127 Unit: ms
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
V40 FCU SIJ DWL FXY
6200 SRP
(M)
V40 1 : Tool change for TNV-40 can be commanded by T-code alone.

0 : Tool change for TNV-40 cannot be commanded by T-code alone.
SRP 1: Shift is performed by rapid traverse.
0: Shift is not performed by rapid traverse.
FCU 1 : Rapid traverse in positioning mode(G00), or linear interpolation in the mode other than
positioning mode(G01, G02, G03), is performed to move to the hole machining point in
canned cycle.
0 : Always rapid traverse is performed to move to the hole maching point in canned cycle.
SIJ 1 : After spindle orientation, the tool retract direction and movement amount are specified by
the program(I,J,K) in canned fine boring cycle and black boring cycle.
0 : After spindle orientation, the tool retract direction is set by a parameter #6240 and the
movement amount is specified by program (Q) in canned fine boring cycle and black
boring cycle.
DWL 1 : Dwell command by P is effective in canned tapping cycle.
0 : Dwell command by P is invalid in canned tapping cycle.
FXY 1 : Hole machining axis in canned cycle is selected by a program.
0 : Hole machining axis in canned cycle is always Z axis.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6201 MN5
MN5 1 : Among the boring canned cycles, M05 is not output before M19,M03 and M04 are output.
Applied G code : G74, G76, G84, G87
0 : Among the boring canned cycles, M05 is output before M19,M03 and M04 are output.
Applied G code : G74, G76, G84, G87
7-56
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NRC MOR
6202 TPK ABS FCK OAC
(L) (L)
TPK 1: In automatic operation MODE, the design screen is maintained, with manual operation and
handle operation selected.
0: In automatic operation MODE, the design screen is not maintained, with manual operation
and handle operation selected.
ABS 1 : Graphic tool path is displayed according to absolute coordinates.
0 : Graphic tool path is displayed according to machine coordinates.
FCK 1 : Feed check function on the graphic screen enabled.
0 : Feed check function on the graphic screen disenabled.
OAC 1: Tool length offset(lath: tool position offset) during G28/G30 mode will be automatically
cancelled.
0: Tool length offset(lath : tool position offset) during G28/G30 mode will cause 109 rpr in
tool offset alarm.
NRC 1 : Tool length offset
Finishing for the roughing is not performed at the end of roughing cycle (G71, G72).
0 : Finishing for the roughing is performed at the end of roughing cycle (G71,G72).
MOR 1 : Turning cycle is performed in a block where no movement command, during the canned
turning cycle mode.
0 : Turning cycle is not performed in a block where no movement command, during the
canned turning cycle mode.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6203
Not used
6205 SPEED COLORING MAX

6206 SPEED COLORING LEVEL
Not used
7-57
Chapter 7 Parameter
6210 RETURN AMOUNT G73
Specify the return amount in canned cycle G73.

Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Data range : 0~99999999
d : return amount
(X, Y)
Initial point
R point
Q
d
Q
d
Z point
6211 CLEARANCE AMOUNT G83
Specify the clearance amount in canned cycle G83.

Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Data range : 0~99999999
(X,Y)
d : clearance amount
Initial point
R point
Q
d
Q
d
Z point
7-58
6212 CHAMFERING AMOUNT (L)
Specify the chamfering amount in the thread cutting cycle(G76,G92).

Data range : 0~127 Unit : 0.1 pitch
6213 CHAMFERING ANGLE (L)
Specify the chamfering angle in the thread cutting cycle.

Data range : 0~60 Unit : 1 deg
6215 RETRACT AMOUNT G71 G72 (L)
Specify the retract amount in the roughing cycle (G71,G72).
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
6216 CLEARANCE AMOUNT G71 G72 (L)
Specify the clearance amount in the roughing cycle(G71,G72)
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
6217 RETURN AMOUNT G74 G75 (L)
Specify the return amount in the peck drilling cycle (G74) or the grooving cycle. (G75).
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
7-59
Chapter 7 Parameter
6218 MINMUM INFEED G76 (L)
Specify the minimum infeed amount in the thread cutting cycle(G76).

When the infeed amount of one pass in the thread cutting cycle(G76) becomes smaller than the
minimum infeed amount set by this parameter, the infeed amount is clamped at the minimum infeed
amount.
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
6219 FINISH ALLOWANCE G76 (L)
Specify the finish allowance in the thread cutting cycle(G76)
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit

METRIC unit 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
INCH unit 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
6220 SPARK OUT G76 (L)
Specify the number of spark out cut in the thread cutting cycle.
Data range : 0~255
6221 DEPTH OF CUT G71 G72 (L)

Specify the depth of cut in the roughing cycle(G71,G72).
Data range : 1~99999999 (see Data unit of parameter #6219)
6222 RELIEF AMOUNT I G73 (L)

Specify the relief values in X axis direction in the cutting cycle(G73).
Data range : -99999999~99999999 (See Data unit of parameter #6219)
6223 RELIEF AMOUNT K G73 (L)

Specify the relief in Z axis direction in the cutting cycle(G73).
Data range : -99999999~99999999 (See Data unit of parameter #6219)
6224 NUMBER OF DIVISIONS G73 (L)

Specify the number of divisions in the cutting cycle(G73)
Data range : 1~99999999
7-60
6225 TOOL NOSE ANGLE G76 (L)
Specify the tool nose angle in the thread cutting cycle.

Data range : 0~120 unit : deg
6226 INPOSITION WIDTH Z AXIS (M)
Specify the Z-axis inposition width to be applied after finishing one cycle of the canned drilling cycle as
a condition to start positioning in the XY-plane for the next drilling cycle.
6240 TOOL RETRACT DIRECTION

Orientate the spindles of the canned cycle G76 (G86.1 for lathe system) and G87, and then set the
axes and directions that the tool retracts. Or, correspond to each boring axis to set such axes and
directions after the orientation. The set value is specified to axis number, while signs to direction.
Setting value : -8 ~ +8
Ex.) If X-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in Y direction after the spindle is oriented,
Y-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in +Z direction after the spindle is oriented, and
Z-axis is the boring axis, tool retracts in X direction after the spindle is oriented. Set as below.
(The first, second and third axis should be X, Y and Z respectively.)
For parameter of the first axis, 2 (the tool retracts in Y direction.)
For parameter of the second axis, 3 (the tool retracts in +Z direction.)
For parameter of the third axis, 1 (the tool retracts in X direction.)
In other than cases mentioned above, Set to 0.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PDM PBM GLS AB2 FD2 SCR RIN
6400 FPS
(M) (M)
PDM 1 : Display pattern input screen in modes of zero return, manual operation or handle
operation.
0 : Do not display pattern input screen in a mode of zero return, manual operation or handle
operation.
PBM 1 : Use screen only for point boring. (From No. O6000 to O6999)
0 : Do not use screen only for point boring.
GLS 1 : Use screen only for glass scribing. (From No. O5000 to O5999)
0 : Do not use the screen only for glass scribing.
AB2 1 : Communicate with absolute encoder through COM2.
0 : Communicate with absolute encoder through COM1.
FD2 1 : RS232C No. 2 is used to connect the floppy disk unit.
0 : RS232C No.1 is used to connect the floppy disk unit.
FPS 1: There is no FILE extension for the USER FLOPPY DISK (O1234).
0: The FILE extension for the USER FLOPPY DISK is .nc (O1234.nc).
SCR 1 : The unit for the scaling factor is multiplied by 0.001
0 : The unit for the scaling factor is multiplied by 0.0001
7-61
Chapter 7 Parameter
RIN 1 : The angle command for coordinate system rotation(G68) is different for absolute(G90)
and incremental(G91) command mode.
0 : The angle command(R) for coordinate system rotation(G68) is always an absolute one.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ALY CPN ALF XSC
6401 PDS SAW FDD ASN
(C) (C) (C) (M)
ALF 1 : Alignment function. Set the first and second points as a point on Y-axis.
0 : Alignment function. Set the first and second points as a point on X-axis.
CPN 1 : Use pattern data for gas cutting.
0 : Do not use pattern data for gas cutting.
ALF 1 : Use alignment function for gas cutting.
0 : Do not use alignment function for gas cutting.
PDS 1 : Display pattern input screen with AUTO mode selected.
0 : Do not display pattern input screen with AUTO selected.
SAW 1 : Use screen only for the first axis running saw.
0 : Do not use screen only for the first axis running saw.
FDD 1 : The Floppy Disk Drive unit is used.
0 : The Floppy Disk Drive unit is not used.
ASN 1 : The automatic sequence No. geration function is valid.
0 : The automatic sequence No. geration function is not valid.
XSC 1 : Scaling factor is commanded with I,J,K.(Scaling and mirror image are valid for each
axis.)
0 : Scaling factor is commanded with P
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RSD RTC TR2 ALC
6402 EX9 EX8 NSR PPR
(C) (C) (C) (C)
RSD 1: From the automatic operation program screen, gas cutting DATA is displayed on the right.
The following must be satisfied prior to use: 2202 HCH=1, 6401 CPN=0.
0: From the automatic operation program screen, gas cutting DATA is not displayed on the
right.
RTC 1: The path is indicated in advance on the design screen.
0: The path is not indicated in advance on the design screen.
RT2 1: From the design screen preview function, the compensating value for the path is rendered
invalid.
0: From the design screen preview function, the compensating value for the path is rendered
valid.
EX9 1: Hide the program after O9000 in the table.
0: Do not hide the program after O9000 in the table.
EX8 1: Hide the program after O8000 in the table.
0: Do not hide the program after O8000 in the table.
ALC 1: The Align function is rendered invalid.
0: The Align function is rendered valid.
NSR Function to RESTART from sequence number #699 for the macro variable #698 program
7-62
1: Rendered valid
0: Rendered invalid
PPR 1: The position return function is rendered valid.
0: The position return function is rendered invalid.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRC
6403 DDM CSC BM4 PAC SJ2 SJ1 J0S
(C)
DDM 1: From the disk, delete the CODE that cannot be displayed during NC program input.
0: From the disk, do not delete the CODE that cannot be displayed during NC program input.
CSC 1: The CHECK SUM function is rendered valid.
0: The CHECK SUM function s rendered invalid.
CRC 1: When entering a circular arc, cutter compensation is allowed.
0: When entering a circular arc, cutter compensation is not allowed.
BM4 1: In the illustrated table for the machining setup, display 4 figures in one screen.
0: In the illustrated table for the machining setup, display 16 figures in one screen.
PAC 1: For PLC axis setup, the PLC G ADDRESS has higher priority than the parameter.
0: For PLC axis setup, the parameter has higher priority than the PLC G ADDRESS.
SP2 1: For special diagnosis, carry out INTERRUPT diagnosis.
0: For special diagnosis, carry out reference point return diagnosis.
SP1 For special diagnosis
J0S 1: Display the POS SET menu on the manual operation position screen and make the
corresponding 0SET valid.
0: Do not display the POS SET menu on the manual operation position screen.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PIO TPA
6404 SWD RTT CGP AE3 AE2 AE1
(PNC) (E)
PIO Reserved
RTT 1: The movement for the RETURN function is carried out in a straight line.
0: The movement for the RETURN function is carried out one axis at a time.
CGP 1: From the GAS cutter PATTERN A TYPE, PLC TIMER is used.]
0: From the GAS cutter PATTERN A TYPE, MACRO is used.]
TPA Reserved
AE3/AE2/AE1
Assign the ABSOLUTE ENCODER type (MAKER).
000: Use Panasonic.
001: Use YASKWA.
7-63
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6405 EFN PTC SWR VAR MSG MNG PAD TPN
EFN 1: From the Program edit screen, the file operation function is used.
0: From the Program edit screen, the file operation function is not used.
PTC 1: From the Program edit screen, the partial copy function is used.
0: From the Program edit screen, the partial copy function is not used.
SVR 1: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is used.
0: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is not used.
VAR 1: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is displayed/ expanded automatically.
0: From the servo waveform, the ANALOG input voltage is not displayed/ expanded
automatically.
MSG 1: The machine state display function is rendered valid (RUNNING SAW).
0: The machine state display function is rendered invalid (RUNNING SAW).
MNG 1: Activate for the manager (RUNNING SAW).
0: Activate for the operator (RUNNING SAW).
PAD 1: The KeyPad display is used (RUNNING SAW).
0: The KeyPad display is not used (RUNNING SAW).
PTN 1: The TOUCH PANEL is used (RUNNING SAW).
0: The TOUCH PANEL is not used (RUNNING SAW).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6406 USB CPS SWE ADM SPN
USB 1: The USB Memory Access Control Program Control MENU is displayed.
0: The USB Memory Access Control Program Control MENU is not displayed.
CPS: 1: Use the machining setup screen G-CODE generation function.
0: Do not use the machining setup screen G-CODE generation function.
SWE 1: From the Running Saw dedicated screen, the automatic operation mark is shaped like a panel.
0: From the Running Saw dedicated screen, the automatic operation mark is shaped like a
machine.
ADM 1: Carry out Demo operation according to the File DmyInput content.
0: Do not carry out Demo operation.
SPN 1: Use the Special screen for the Touch Panel.
0: Do not use the Special screen for the Touch Panel.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6407
Not used
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6408
Not used
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6409
Not used
7-64
6410 MAGNIFICATIONS P G51 (M)
Specify the (G51) scaling factor P.

Data range : 1~99999999 Unit : 0.001 or 0.00001 according to parameter #6400, SCR
6411 ROTATION ANGLE R G68 (M)
Specify the rotation angle for G68 coordinate system rotation.

Data range : -360000~360000 Unit : 0.001 DEG
6421 MAGNIFICATIONS G51 (M)
Specify the rotation angle for G68 coordinate system rotation.

Data range : -999999~999999 Unit : 0.001 or 0.00001 according to parameter #6400, SCR
6500 TYPE OF SAVE DATA

From the function that saves the internal DATA (MACRO, DATATABLE, RELAY, and COUNTER)
in a FILE when G257.0 is ON in SENTROL2, set up the DATA.
0 : No DATA to save
1 : Save the MACRO DATA.
2 : Save the DATATABLE.
3 : Save the RELAY.
4 : Save the COUNTER.
6501 NUMBER OF SAVE DATA

Set up the DATA number and Number of Bytes (for the PLC DATA) assigned by 6500.
MACRO DATA: MACRO number
DATATABLE, RELAY, COUNTER: Number of Bytes * 1000 + DATA number
6610 CORNER OVERRIDE MIN (M)
Specify the minimum federate for deceleration(MDR) during inner circular cutting in automatic corner
override mode.
Data range : 1~100 Unit : % Standard setting : 1
6611 CORNER OVERRIDE ANGLE (M)
Specify the inner angle of the inside corner part for automatic corner override.
Data range : 1~89 Unit : 2 deg Standard setting : 46
7-65
Chapter 7 Parameter
6612 CORNER OVERRIDE VALUE (M)
Deceleration ratio for automatic corner override at an inner corner part. Specify the override amount at
inner corner.
Data range : 1~100 Unit : % Standard setting : 50
6613 CORNER OVERRIDE LE (M)
End point of deceleration distance of automatic override at inner corner part.

Specify the operating range LE. Unit
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
METRIC unit 1 0.1 0.01 mm
INCH unit 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch
6614 CORNER OVERRIDE LS (M)

Start point of deceleration distance of automatic override at inner corner part. Specify the operating
range LS.
Data range : 1~4000 Unit : Refer to unit table of parameters 6613
6616 CIRCLE ERROR LIMIT (M)

Establish the allowable radius error in circular motion cutting for automatic feed clamp calculation.
Data range : 1~4000
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit

Increment system
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
6620 NO CUTTING SPEED OVERRIDE
Set to 0 or override speed for parts without cutting.
6820 AMOUNT / DIRCETION (G60)

Set the approach amount and direction for (G60) single direction position. Direction is decided
according to the + or sign of the data and the amount by the data itself.
Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
Linear axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Rotary axis. 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg
Data range : -32767~32767
7-66
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
6901 PCM IGP
PCM 1: Output the signal by calculating the acceleration/deceleration and servo delay.
0: Output the signal without calculating the acceleration/deceleration and servo delay.
IGP 1: The POSITION SWITCH function is rendered valid.
0: The POSITION SWITCH function is rendered invalid.
6910 AXIS NUMBER OF POS SWITCH 1

Set up the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis number.
If the setup value is 0, POSITION SWITCH 1 is rendered invalid.
Setup value: 0~8, 16 (maximum number of axes to control)
7-67
Chapter 7 Parameter
6930 MAXIMUM OF POS SWITCH 1

Set up the maximum value for the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis setup range.
Setup value: -99999999 ~ 99999999
7-68
6950 MINIMUM OF POS SWITCH 1

Set up the minimum value for the POSITION SWITCH 1 target axis setup range.
Setup value: -99999999 ~ 99999999
7-69
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7000 PRT MCM BCS SCS TCS
PRT 1 : When outputting Dprint macro space, (blank) is output.

0 : When outputting Dprint macro space, (blank) is not output.
MCM 1 : At the program call by M-code method 09006-09009 are called by macro calls (parameter
designation possible).
0 : At the program call by M-code method 09006-09009 are called by sub program calls.
BCS 1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by B code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by B code.
SCS 1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by S code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by S code.
TCS 1 : Custom macro (subprogram) is called by T code.
0 : Custom macro (subprogram) is not called by T code.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7002 MIN TSE MPR - MUS
MIN 1 : Block end interrupt.

0 : Block stop interrupt.
TSE 1 : Status trigger.
0 : Edge trigger.
MPR 1 : Specify M code with macro interrupt ON/OFF.
0 : Use M96/M97.
MUS 1 : Macro interrupt is on.
0 : Macro Interrupt is off.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Not used.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7011 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Not used.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7011 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Not used.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Not used.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7013 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
Not used.
7-70
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7014 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
Not used.
7033 MACRO INTERRUPT ON M CODE
M code number with macro interrupt ON
7034 MACRO INTERRUPT OFF M CODE
M code number with macro interrupt OFF
7050 G CALLING NO.9010
Specify the G codes to call the custom macros of program No.9010





7-71
Chapter 7 Parameter





7071 M CALLING NO.9001
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9001.

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999
7-72
Specify the M codes to call the custom macros of program No.9005

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999

Data range : 0~9999
7110 DRY RUN PROGRAM RESTART
Specify the axis order to move to the restart position in dry run at program restart.
Data range : 1~8
Note) For axis numbers please refer to parameter 1020.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7200 SFP HSS DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
SFP 1 : The feedrate of the skip function using high speed skip signal is set by
parameter(#7211~#7214).
0 : The feedrate of the skip function using high speed skip signal is set by
commanded F-code in program.
*This parameter set is valid only if HSS is set to 1
*If high speed skip signal is not used but normal skip signal is used,
refer to parameter #1400 SKF and #1428.
HSS 1 : High speed skip signal is used in skip function.
0 : High speed skip signal is not used in skip function.
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
DS1~DS4 : Set which skip signal is valid to dwell command of G04.

The signals and the bits match as follows.
1 : Skip signal is valid
0 : Skip signal is invalid
Conventional type High speed BIT
skip signal skip signal name
SKIP1 SKIP DS1
SKIP2 None DS2
SKIP3 None DS3
SKIP4 None DS4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7201 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
1S1~1S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31 or G31.1
Set the value to 1 to make the signal valid
The skip signals and the bits match as follows.
SKIP1 SKIP 1S1
SKIP2 None 1S2
SKIP3 None 1S3
SKIP4 None 1S4
2S1~2S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.2.

SKIP1 SKIP 2S1
SKIP2 None 2S2
SKIP3 None 2S3
SKIP4 None 2S4
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7202 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
3S1~3S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.3

Set the value to 1 to make the signal valid. The skip signals and the bits
match as follow.
SKIP1 SKIP 3S1
SKIP2 None 3S2
SKIP3 None 3S3
SKIP4 None 3S4
4S1~4S4 : Set which skip signal is valid to skip commands of G31.4.

SKIP1 SKIP 4S1
SKIP2 None 4S2
SKIP3 None 4S3
SKIP4 None 4S4
7211 FEEDRATE (G31. G31. 1)
7212 FEEDRATE (G31. 2)
Set skip function feeerate for each G code. These parameters are valid when the
parameter #7200 SFP is set to 1
Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
Linear axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 mm/min.
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 0.1 deg/min.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7300 AMH MDC
AMH 1 : High speed skip signal is used for automatic tool offset(G37).
0 : High speed skip signal is not used for automatic tool offset(G37).
MDC 1 : Add the tool measured amount to the current offset amount.
0 : Subtract the tool measured amount from the current offset amount.
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
7311 MEASUREMENT FEEDRATE 1
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement2(G37.2)
Set the measurement feedrate of tool measurement 3(G37.3)

Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
system
Data range : 1~6000
7321 GAMMA VALUE 1
Set the gamma value of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
7322 GAMMA VALUE 2
7323 GAMMA VALUE 3

Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C unit
system
Linear
0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
axis(metric)
Linear axis(inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Data range : -99999999~99999999

Note 1) X axis takes the radius value.
Note 2) Set the value larger than the epsilon value which is set to the parameter.
7331 EPSILON VALUE 1
Set the epsilon value of tool measurement 1(G37.1)
7-

Increment
IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
system
Linear axis(mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm
Linear axis(inch) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch
Data range : -99999999~99999999

Note) X axis takes the radius value.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7400 ABT SNG PAG LTM SIG GS2 GS1
ABT 1 : An alarm is issued for tool change method A when the group of the
return tool number is not the same as the group currently in use.
0 : No alarm is issued for tool change method A, even though the group of
the return tool number is not the same as the group currently in use.
SNG 1 : The tool skip signal is accepted only while the tool life managed tool is
in use.
0 : The tool skip signal is accepted for tools of the designated group on the
group used before(refer to parameter 7400 SIG).
PAG 1 : All group execution data are cleared when the tool reset signal is input.
0 : Only the execution data of the group designated(from outside or through
MDI) are cleared, when the tool reset signal is input.
LTM 1 : Tool life is specified by time
0 : Tool life is specified by frequency of tool use.
SIG 1 : At the time of tool skip signal input, the group No. is also entered.
0 : At the time of tool skip signal input, the current group is skipped.
GS1, GS2 : Specify the number of registerable groups together with the
number of tools per group according to the table below.
GS2 GS1 No. of groups No. of tools/group

0 0 16 16
0 1 32 8
1 0 64 4
1 1 128 2
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CT2 CT1
7401
(M) (M)
CT1, CR2 : Specify the tool change method for tool life monitoring according to the
table below
Tool change
CT2 CT1
method
0 0 A
0 1 B
1 0 C
1 1 D
7440 TOOL LIFE IGNORE 0 ~ 9999 (M)
Specify a number which will be substracted from any commanded tool number with
a bigger value than this number, and the remaining value then becoming the tool
group number in tool life management
Data range : 0~9999
7470 MASTER AXIS FOR SYNC (M)
Determine to which axis synchronous control is performed if performing using

synchronous control selection signals, SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3 and so on.
Set master number of axis where synchronous control is to be performed.
(Ex.) Display parameter under the following condition below.
1st axis --- X-axis
2nd axis --- Y-axis
3rd axis --- Z-axis
4th axis --- U-axis
5th axis --- W-axis
If synchronous control is performed with synchronous control selection signals
SYNC4 and SYNC5, X-axis is synchronously controlled with U-axis, while Z-axis
with W-axis.
Parameter 7470 master axis for sync. X 0
Y 0
Z 0
U 1
W 3
Make sure to set 0 to parameters 1036 and 1037 if using parameter 7470.
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7480 - - TWT TPN TDC PDC TDA PDA
TWT 1: The Twin Table control function is valid.
0: The Twin Table control function is invalid.
TPN 1: During synchronized operation, invert the sign for the feedback control
amount based on the difference in Torque.
0: During synchronized operation, do not invert the sign for the feedback
control amount based on the difference in Torque.
TDC 1: During synchronized operation, control to reduce the Torque difference
between Master and Slave.
0: During synchronized operation, do not control to reduce the Torque
difference between Master and Slave.
PDC 1: During synchronized operation, control to reduce the difference in the
amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
0: During synchronized operation, do not control to reduce the difference in
the amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
TDA 1: During synchronized operation, CHECK the difference in Torque between
Master and Slave. If it exceeds the limit for Parameter 7486, display an
ALARM.
0: During synchronized operation, do not CHECK the difference in Torque
between Master and Slave.
This is valid for simple synchronized control as well.
PDA 1: During synchronized operation, CHECK the difference in the amount of
position variation between Master and Slave. If it exceeds the limit for
Parameter 7485, display an ALARM.
0: During synchronized operation, do not CHECK the difference in the
amount of position variation between Master and Slave.
This is valid for simple synchronized control as well.
7481 SYNCRO POSITION ERR P GAIN

Position variation control proportional GAIN for each Slave axis
Setup range: 0 ~ 32767 GAIN 1 if the setup value is 256
7482 SYNCRO POSITION ERR I GAIN

Position variation control differential GAIN for each Slave axis
7483 SYNCRO TORQUE P GAIN

Torque control proportional GAIN for each Slave axis
7484 SYNCRO TORQUE I GAIN

Torque control differential GAIN for each Slave axis
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
7485 SYNCRO POSITION ERR LIMIT

Position variation difference limit for each Slave axis
If the position variation difference for the synchronized axis exceeds the Setup Value,
an ALARM will be generated.
If parameter 7480 <PDA> is 0, the threshold check is invalid.
Unit: Detection unit (pulse) Setup range: 0 ~ 32767
7486 SYNCRO TORQUE LIMIT

Torque difference limit for each Slave axis
If the Torque difference for the synchronized axis exceeds the Setup Value, an
ALARM will be generated.
If parameter 7480 <TDA> is 0, the threshold check is invalid.
Unit: 4.88mV Setup range: 0 ~ 500
7487 SYNCRO TORQUE CHANGE

Set up the Torque value to reduce the Torque difference between each Slave axis.
If the difference between the Master and Slave axes exceeds the Setup Value, control
to reduce the Torque.
Unit: 4.88mV Setup range: 0 ~ 1000
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7600 2A1 1A1
2A1 1 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.2 command.

0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.2 command.
1A1 1: High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.3 command.
0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.1 command
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7601 3A1
3A1 1 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is valid to the G37.3 command

0 : High speed skip signal(SKIP) is invalid to the G37.3 command
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7603 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0
OP7 1 : Feed override is commanded from(MOP) machine operators panel.

0 : Feed override is commanded from DKU (display & keyboard unit).
OP6 1 : MPG pulse multiplier is selected from MOP.
0 : MPG pulse multiplier is selected from DKU
OP5 1 : MPG move axis is selected from MOP
0 : MPG move axis is selected from DKU
OP4 1 : Jog feed or rapid traverse is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feed or rapid traverse is selected from DKU
OP3 1 : Rapid traverse rate is selected from MOP.
0 : Rapid traverse rate is selected form DKU
OP2 1 : Jog feedrate is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feedrate is selected form DKU
OP1 1 : Jog feed axis is selected from MOP
0 : Jog feed axis is selected from DKU
OP0 1 : Operating mode is selected from MOP
0 : Operating mode is selected from DKU
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7604 OPF OPD OPC OP9 OP8
OPF Not used

OPD 1 : The cursor display will change immediately in case one of the protect
key signals(G5.4~G5.7) changes.
0 : The cursor display will not change immediately in case one of the protect
key signals (G5.4~G5.7) changes.
OPC 1 : The override cursors on the spindle speed screen are not displayed.
0 : The override cursors on the spindle speed screen are displayed.(override
display follows the input at the PLC-NC signals G18.0-7)
OP9 1 : Software operators panel switches are not displayed in program display
mode.
0 : Software operators panel switches are displayed in program display
mode.
OP8 1 : Feed override cancel is commanded from machine operators panel.
0 : Feed override cancel is commanded from DKU (display & key board unit)
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8000 TAC STF BAK PRT NPA
TAC 1: THERMAL ALARM CHECK is not carried out.

0: THERMAL ALARM CHECK is carried out.
STF 1 : Use step feed function in MPG mode.
0 : Do not use step feed function in MPG mode.
BAK 1 : Save data for parameter, pitch error and tool life to a file only once
during startup.
0 : Save data for parameter, pitch error and tool life to a file on a periodic
basis during startup.
PRT 1: The NC Program PROTECT function is rendered valid.
0: The NC Program PROTECT function is rendered invalid.
NPA 1: Even if an alarm is generated, the screen is not changed automatically to
the alarm message display screen.
0: If an alarm is generated, the screen changes automatically to the alarm
message display screen.
.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8002 RPC WSM CAP BZ2 BUZ TPE ENG
RPC 1 : For the graphic scaling function rapid traverse movement is disregarded
(only cutting path is regarded), when calculating the display area.
0: For the graphic scaling function both, rapid traverse movement and cutting
path, are regarded, when calculating the display area.
WSM 1 : Search or replace even if part correspondence is shown at the word
beginning.
0 : Search or replace only if correspondence is shown over the whole words.
CAP 1 : The simple interactive graphic input function is fully valid.
0 : Only mune programming (without graphic support) is available.
BZ2 1 : Built-in BUZZER function valid(BUZZER CONTROL1 OFF).
0 : Built-in BUZZER function invalid(BUZZER CONTROL1 On).
TPE 1 : In reset state the toolpath display is cleared in auto mode.
0 : In reset state the toolpath display is not cleared in auto mode.
ENG 1 : English display.
0 : Korea display
7-
8003 FND MCL

FND 1: Actual Feed is not displayed.
0: Actual Feed is displayed.
MCL 1: In the machining setup screen, the CLR menu is displayed at the MACRO
DATA input position.
0: In the process setup screen, the CLR menu is not displayed at the
MACRO DATA input position.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8004
Not used
8005 DISPLAY LANGUAGE

Select the basic language.
0: Korean
1: Japanese
2: Chinese
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8010 EOF PSM BMP BZH SWM HLP MEF MEN
EOF 1 : Do not recognize % as the end of a file to display data after % .

0 : Recognize % as the end of a file not to display data after % .
PSM 1 : Use absolute coordinates for position data setting.
0 : Use relative coordinates for position data setting.
BMP 1: For the Illustrated Table function, display the table with a BITMAP.
0: For the Illustrated Table function, display the table with a program.
BZH 1 : Set buzzer frequency to 3000.
0 : Set buzzer frequency to 18000.
SWM 1 : Set on the right side of a wood figure machine.
0 : Set on the left side of a wood figure machine.
HLP 1 : Use parameter help function.
0 : Do not use parameter help function.
MEF 1 : Determine effective digit number of macro data.
0 : Do not determine effective digit number of macro data.
MEN 1 : Set effective digit number of macro data to 12.
0 : Set effective digit number of macro data to 8.
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8011 ST2 ST1 EAC UBC UMC CLT SMF OPK
ST2 1 : Continues searching by scrolling from the end to the beginning or vice
versa during search on the ladder screen.
0 : No scroll search is available during search on the ladder screen.
ST1 1 : Start from the beginning in case of the first search of address on the
ladder screen.
0 : Start from the displayed position in case of the first search of address on
the ladder screen.
EAC 1: During the movement of the assigned position due to the PLC, allow speed
to be assigned for each axis.
0: During the movement of the assigned position due to the PLC, assign the
same speed to all axes.
UBK 1 : Insert space between data devices on the processing setting screen.
0 : Do not insert space between data devices on the processing setting
screen.
UMC 1 : Distinguish automatic mode from other modes on the processing setting
screen.
0 : Do not distinguish automatic mode from other modes on the processing
setting screen.
CLT 1 : Text calculation function become valid.
0 : Text calculation function become invalid.
SMF 1 : Display in a small font on the processing setting screen.
0 : Display in a big font on the processing setting screen.
OPK 1 : Extend keys used in parameters 2020 and 2021.
0 : Do not extend keys used in parameters 2020 and 2021.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8012 AS1 AS0 RET AMA EPL SCD EAX WNS
AS1 Position return coordinates system setup 2

AS0 Position return coordinates system setup 1
AS1 AS0 Assigned coordinate system
0 0 Machine coordinate system
0 1 Absolute coordinate system
1 0 Relative coordinate system
1 1 Relative coordinate system
RET 1 : Use automatic operation position return function.

0 : Do not use automatic operation position return function.
AMA 1: Allow movement of the assigned position due to the PLC in automatic
operation as well (in the PLC axis).
0: Prohibit movement of the assigned position due to the PLC in automatic
operation.
EPL 1 : PLC axis is excluded in display showing zero return of all axes is
completed.
7-
0 : PLC axis appears is included in display showing zero return of all axes is
completed.
SCD 1 : Display the second auxiliary data value on the automatic operation
program screen. (L/G)
0 : Do not display he second auxiliary data value on the automatic
operation program screen. (L/G)
EAX 1 : E axis is available.
0 : E-axis is unavailable.
WNS 1 : Do not regard program set in WORK NO. SEARCH function as selection
program.
0 : Regard program set in WORK NO. SEARCH function as selection program.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8100 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0
CN0 1 : Accept file sending request.

0 : Do not accept file sending request.
CN1 1 : Accept file receiving request.
0 : Do not accept file receiving request.
CN2 1 : High speed directory transfer is valid.
0 : High speed directory transfer is invalid.
CN3 1 : High speed transfer for file sending request is valid.
0 : High speed transfer n for file sending request is invalid.
CN4 1 : High speed transfer for file receiving request is valid.
0 : High speed transfer for file receiving request is invalid.
CN5 1 : Attach comment to directory.
0 : Do not attach comment to directory.
CN6 1 : Directory update control is valid.

0 : Directory update control is invalid.
CN7 1 : Confirmation for remote operating data receiving is valid.
0 : Confirmation for remote operating data receiving is invalid.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8101 CNF CNE CND CNC CNB CNA CN9 CN8
CNF Not Used

CNE Not Used
CND Not Used
CNC Not Used
CNB 1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, if the Write command
fails, store the data in the buffer and send it later.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, if the Write command
fails, gather and send the data again later.
CAN 1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the response for
the Read command and then send the Write command after processing the
PLC inside the NC.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the response for
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
the Read command and then send the Write command without processing
the PLC inside the NC.
CNA Parameter for communication with MITSUBISHI PLC
CN9 1: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, receive the data and
then send the next command immediately.
0: During communication with the MITSUBISHI PLC, send the command first
before processing the received data.
CN8 1: From the Network, process the received data immediately.
0: From the Network, process the received data one at a time.
8110 NETWORK MAX CONNECTION ( i,PR )
Set the maximum connection of N network.

8111 NETWORK RESPONSE DELAY ( i,PR )
Set network response delay.

Setting value: 0~10000 Setting unit: msec
8120 NET COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD ( i,PR )
Set network command repeat period.

8121 NET COMMAND REPEAT TIMES ( i,PR )
Set network command repeat times.

Setting value: 1~10
8122 DIR COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD ( i,PR )
Set directory command repeat period.

8123 DIR COMMAND REPEAT TIMES ( i,PR )
Set directory command repeat times.

Setting value: 1~10
8124 DIRECTORY PACKET SIZE ( i,PR )
Set directory packet size.

7-
8125 FILE COMMAND REPEAT PERIOD ( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving command repeat period.

8126 FILE COMMAND REPEAT TIMES ( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving command repeat times.

Setting value: 1~10
8127 FILE PACKET SIZE ( i,PR )
Set file sending/receiving packet size.

8128 NUMBER OF FILE PACKETS

( i,PR )
Set the number of file sending/receiving packets.

Setting value: 1~10
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8150 NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0
NB7 1: Functions for handle axis and unit remote setting are valid.
0: Functions for handle axis and unit remote setting are invalid.
NB5 1: Remote operation start/stop/reset functions are valid.
0: Remote operation start/stop/reset functions are invalid.
NB2 1: Remote modification function for parameter is valid.
0: Remote modification function for parameter is invalid.
NB1 1: File sending/receiving function is valid.
0: File sending/receiving function is invalid.
NB0 1: Remote monitoring function is valid.
0: Remote monitoring function is invalid.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8151 NBF NBE NBD NBC NBB NBA NB9 NB8
NBA 1: All files are receivable.

0: Only processing programs are receivable.
NB8 1: Remote override function is valid.
0: Remote override function is invalid.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8152
Not used.
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
8400 SPEED MAX ( ABI ) (i)
Set the maximum parameter speed that determines linear positive (negative)
acceleration prior to interpolation during high-speed precision processing.
Setting value: 0~32767 Setting unit: 10mm/min
8401 TIME CONSTANT ( ABI ) (i)
Set the time for the maximum parameter speed that determines linear positive
(negative) acceleration prior to interpolation during high-speed precision
processing.
Feedrate V
[ mm/min]
parameter 8400
Parameter 8401
Time T [ msec ]
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(i)
8402 OVP DT2 DT1 DT0
OVP 1 : Overlap function is valid.

0 : Overlap function is invalid.
Bit6 1: The Maximum speed CLAMP is rendered invalid.
0: The Maximum speed CLAMP is rendered valid.
Bit4 1: From the Edge Stop Block, carry out the in-position Check.
0: From the Edge Stop Block, do not carry out the in-position Check.
Set distribution cycle using DT2, DT1 and DT0. The relationship between setting
value and distribution cycle is shown below.
For SENTROL2, the standard distribution cycle is 8msec, but softwear option can
be set to 4msec.
DT2 DT1 DT0 Dist. cycle Block speed Remarks

0 0 0 8msec 125block/sec Standard setting
0 0 1 4msec 250block/sec
0 1 0 2msec 500block/sec Optional
0 1 1 1msec 1000block/sec Optional
1 0 0 0.5msec 2000block/sec Optional
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(i)
8403 HS6 HS4 HS3 HS2 HS1 HS0
HS6 1: The acceleration CLAMP function is valid.

0: The acceleration CLAMP function is invalid.
HS4 1: The pre-deceleration function for the speed CLAMP is valid.
0: The pre-deceleration function for the speed CLAMP is invalid.
HS3 1: The speed CLAMP due to a SMALL BLOCK is valid.
0: The speed CLAMP due to a SMALL BLOCK is invalid.
HS2 1: The automatic Path Correction function is valid.
0: The automatic Path Correction function is invalid.
HS1 1: The ERASE SMALL BLOCK function is valid.
0: The ERASE SMALL BLOCK function is invalid.
HS0 1: BELL type acceleration/deceleration valid prior to interpolation
0: BELL type acceleration/deceleration invalid prior to interpolation
8404 TIME CONSTANT L (ABI ) (i)
For high-speed, high-precision processing, set up the time for the straight section of
the time it takes to reach the maximum speed for the parameter that determines the
acceleration for the BELL type acceleration/deceleration during interpolation.
8405 TIME CONSTANT S (ABI ) (i)
For high-speed, high-precision processing, set up the time for the curved section of
the time it takes to reach the maximum speed for the parameter that determines the
acceleration for the BELL-type acceleration/deceleration prior to interpolation.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8406
Not used
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
( i,PR )
8407
Not used
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
8410 CORNER VELOCITY DIFF (i)
Set the limit value of corner velocity difference for each axis.
Setting value: 0~32767 Setting unit: mm/min
Feedrate V
[ mm/min ] Decelerated to limit value of velocity increment
Time T [ msec ]
8411 TIME CONSTANT FOR MAX ACCEL (i)
Number constant for allowable acceleration of each axis. Set the time to reach the
maximum speed (parameter 1422).
8412 IGNORED VELOCITY FLUCTUATION (i)
Set the ignored velocity fluctuation as ratio.

Setting value: 0~100 Setting unit: % Standard value: 10 %
8415 AREA2 OVERRIDE (i)
Override value in area 2.

Setting value: 0~100 Setting unit: % Standard value : 80 %
AREA1 : 0 < 30
AREA2 : 30 < 45
AREA3 : 45 < 60
AREA4 : 60 < 90

7-


8418 TIME CONSTANT ( AAI ) (i)
Set the time constant for linear positive (negative) acceleration after interpolation
in high-speed fixed processing mode (G61.1).
Valid if the parameter 1400 < LAI > equals 1.
Setting value: 0~100 Setting unit: msec Standard value : 8
8419 CORNER ANGLE (i)
If the corner angle difference exceeds the value in high-speed precision processing
mode, a machine is decelerated and then stopped.
Setting value: 0~90 Setting unit: DEG Standard value : 15
8420 CUTTING INPOSITION (i)
Set the width for inposition check in case of 8402<INP>=1 if a machine is

decelerated and then stopped in high-speed precision processing mode (G61.1).
Setting unit: detection unit (pulse) Setting range: 0~1000
8422 FEED FORWARD GAIN1 (i)

Set up the FEED FORWARD GAIN1 integer.
Setup value: 0~100
8423 FEED FORWARD GAIN2 (i)

Set up the FEED FORWARD GAIN2 number.
8425 POSITION TOLERANCE (i)

Set up the POSITION TOLERANCE integer.
8426 TOLERANCE TO ERASE SMALL BLOCK (i)

Set up the path tolerance to erase small blocks.
Setup value: 0~1000
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter
8427 TOLERANCE FOR SMOOTHING (i)

Set up the tolerance for automatic path correction.
Setup value: 0~1000
9000 PC DIAG. MAX DISP:X

From the PLC diagnosis screen, set up the maximum number that can be displayed
for command X.
Setup value: 0~432
9001 PC DIAG. MAX DISP:Y

for command Y.
Setup value: 0~432
9002 PC DIAG. MAX DISP:R
for command R.
Setup value: 0~519
9003 PC DIAG. MAX DISP: D

for command D.
Setup value: 0~511
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9010 EP4 SPS IO4 IO3 IO2 IO1
EP4 1: EPS4 RAD ANALOG input is used.

0: EPS4 RAD ANALOG input is not used.
SPS 1: The SPINDLE axis is not used.
0: The SPINDLE axis is used.
IO4 1: DIO3Board NO. 4 is installed.
0: DIO3Board NO. 4 is not installed.
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9011 R12 R11 R1A
R12 1 : RIO1 printed board No.2 is mounted.

0 : RIO1 printed board No.2 is not mounted.
R1A 1 : RIO1printed board is automatically recognized.
0 : RIO1printed board is not automatically recognized.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9012 R28 R27 R26 R25 R24 R23 R22 R21
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9013 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1
AD8 1 : Use ALALOG voltage input CH8.

0 : Do not ALALOG voltage input CH8.
7-
Chapter 7 Parameter

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9014 GM7 GM6 GM5 GM4 GM3 GM2 GM1 GMA
GM7 1 : Mask F7 key menu for gas cutter.

0 : Do not mask F7 key menu for gas cutter.
0 : Do not F4 key menu for gas cutter.
GMA 1 : Mask all menus for gas cutter.
0 : Do not all menus for gas cutter.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9015 R2C R2B R2A R29
A parameter that allows up to 12 RIO2 Boards to be connected by mounting a third
EPS3 board
R29 1: RIO2 Board NO. 9 is installed.
0: RIO2 Board NO. 9 is not installed.
R2A 1: RIO2 Board NO. 10 is installed.
R2B 1: RIO2 Board NO.11 is installed.
R2C 1: RIO2 Board NO. 12 is installed.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9016 WIP
WIP 1: AnyWire (UniWire) is used.
0: AnyWire (UniWire) is not used.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9017 WA8 WA7 WA6 WA5 WA4 WA3 WA2 WA1
This is a parameter for measuring the voltage value from the servo waveform
(may be used if mounted on a RAD board).
7-
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9018
reserve Parameter
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9090 DB7 DB6 DB5 DB4 DB3 DB2 DB1 DB0
9091 DBF DBE DBD DBC DBB DBA DB9 DB8
9092 DBN DBM DBL DBK DBJ DBI DBH DBG
9093 DBW DBU DBT DBS DBR DBQ DBP DBO
9094 DB* DB/ DB- DB+ DBZ DBY DBX DBW
9095
Parameter for development debug
9096
9097
Parameter for development debug
7-
1. Repair Tools
1. Repair Tools
The following measuring instruments are required to determine whether the power supplied to NC is
appropriate and whether the wiring is appropriate:
(1) Measuring instruments
Measuring Instrument Condition Usage

Measures the AC power
AC voltmeter Allowance of 2% or less
voltage
Maximum scale: 10V,
30V Measures the DC power
DC voltmeter
voltage
Allowance of 2% or less
General measurements
OSCILLOSCOPE
and troubleshooting
(2) Tools
Cross-tip screwdriver --------------- Large, medium, small
Slotted screwdriver --------------- Medium, small
2. Air filter
The cabinet of the equipment uses SENTROL2 MAIN UNIT and has an air filter that needs to be cleaned
periodically (once a week). This is because the efficiency decreases as the dust accumulates; this in turn
increases the temperature inside the cabinet.
Unscrew the bolt and remove the air filter.
Remove dust from the filter.
Screw the filter back with the bolt.
8-
3. Checkpoints Before Requesting for After-sales Service
Check the following first before requesting for after-sales service:
1) When?
Date and time of trouble.
2) When was the trouble found?

What was the NC operation mode?
Information on the program number, contents, tool offset value, etc., in case of automatic operation
Position display value when the trouble occurred
Do other functions work properly?
3) What type of trouble is it?

Alarm number
LED display on PCB
Display on SERVO UNIT and SPINDLE UNIT
Is the screen displayed normally?
4) How often was the trouble found?

How often was the trouble found (every time or from time to time?)
Does the trouble occur when other machines are operated?
Are the power and voltage normal (does the voltage drop suddenly when other machines are
operated?)?
Does the trouble occur during a specific operation?
8-
1. Basic Interface Connection
Appendix
1. Basic Interface Connection
MAIN UNIT MAIN UNIT
DIO3 Board NO.1 EPS3 Board
CNIN1 Dsub37P CABLE CNIN1 H50F Power Circuit
/EPS4 Board
TBU1 NO.1 Dsub25P
of Machine CABLE
AC SERVO AC
CNOUT1 Dsub37P CABLE CNOUT1 H50F Power Circuit CNA1 CABLE CNA1
UNIT MOTOR
TCN2
of Machine X-Axis X-Axis
CNIO1 Dsub37P CABLE CNIO1 H50F Power Circuit CABLE
TBU1
of Machine Dsub25P
AC SERVO CABLE AC
DIO3 Board NO.2 CNA2 CABLE CNA2
UNIT MOTOR
CNIN2 Dsub37P CABLE CNIN2 H50F Power Circuit Y-Axis Y-Axis
TBU1 CABLE
of Machine
CNOUT2 Dsub37P CABLE CNOUT2 H50F Power Circuit Dsub25P
TCN2 AC SERVO CABLE
AC
of Machine CNA3 CABLE CNA3
CNIO2 Dsub37P CABLE CNIO2 H50F Power Circuit UNIT MOTOR
TBU1 Z-Axis Z-Axis
of Machine CABLE
DIO3 Board NO.3 Dsub25P CABLE CN90-4
Note)CNS1 AC SERVO AC
CNIN3 Dsub37P CABLE CNIN3 H50F Power Circuit CABLE CNS1
TBU1 UNIT MOTOR
of Machine (The 4th Axis)
(The 4th Axis) CABLE CN2-4
CNOUT3 Dsub37P CABLE CNOUT3 H50F Power Circuit
TCN2
of Machine
CNIO3 Dsub37P CABLE CNIO3 H50F Power Circuit
TBU1
of Machine EPS3 Board
CNMPG1 Dsub9P CABLE MPG /EPS4 Board
MPG NO.1 NO.2 Dsub25P AC SERVO CABLE AC
CNMPG2 Dsub9P CABLE MPG CNA4 CABLE CNA4 UNIT
MPG NO.2 MOTOR
OPTION A-Axis
OPTION CABLE A-Axis
CNMPG3 Dsub9P CABLE MPG
MPG NO.3
Dsub25P CABLE
AC SERVO AC
CNA5 CABLE CNA5
UNIT MOTOR
RS232C
CNCOM1 Dsub9S CABLE COM1 PUNCH PANEL
B-Axis B-Axis
CABLE
RS232C
CNCOM2 Dsub9S CABLE FDD FDD UNIT (OPTION)
Dsub25P CABLE
AC SERVO AC
Dsub15P Dsub15P CNA6 CABLE CNA6
UNIT MOTOR
(CRT)CND1 CND1 DKU (For SENTROL2)
CABLE CND1 (Display Keyboard Unit) C-AXIS C-AXIS
CABLE
(KEY)CND2 CND2 (DKU7)
CABLE CND2 ACIN Dsub25P CABLE CN90-8
Dsub25P Dsub9P AC SERVO AC
Note)CNS2 CABLE CNS2
UNIT MOTOR
Power UNIT MOL6R (The 8th Axis) (The 8th Axis)
CNACOUT CABLE ACOUT Power ON/OFF CABLE CN2-8
(PSP7 Board) SWITCH
CNACIN MOL4R CABLE ACIN
AC220V Single P
MAIN UNIT
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board Dsub25P CABLE AC
AC SERVO LINEAR
NO.1 CABLE CNA1
UNIT MOTOR SCALE
CNA1 CABLE
X-Axis X-Axis
CABLE CNA1L
Dsub25P CABLE AC
AC SERVO LINEAR
CNA2 CABLE CNA2
UNIT MOTOR SCALE
CABLE Y-Axis
Y-Axis
CABLE CNA2L
Dsub25P CABLE AC
AC SERVO LINEAR
CNA3 CABLE CNA3
UNIT MOTOR SCALE
CABLE Z-Axis
Z-Axis
CABLE CNA3L
Dsub25P CABLE CN90-

AC SERVO AC LINEAR
UNIT SCALE
MOTOR
CABLE CN2-4
(The 4th Axis) (The 4th Axis)
CABLE CNS1L
EPS3 Board
/EPS4 Board Dsub25P CABLE
AC SERVO AC LINEAR
NO.2 CABLE CNA4
MOTOR SCALE
CNA4 UNIT CABLE
A-Axis A-Axis
CABLE CNA4L
Dsub25P CABLE AC
AC SERVO LINEAR
CNA5 CABLE CNA5
UNIT MOTOR SCALE
CABLE B-Axis
B-Axis
CABLE CNA5L
Dsub25P CABLE
AC SERVO AC LINEAR
CNA6 CABLE CNA6 UNIT MOTOR SCALE
C-Axis CABLE C-Axis
CABLE CNA6L
Dsub25P CABLE CN90-

AC SERVO AC LINEAR
UNIT SCALE
MOTOR
CABLE CN2-8
(The 8th Axis) (The 8th Axis)
CABLE CNS2L
9-1
Appendix
2. DIO3 Board I/O Signal List

CNIN1 Input Signal (DI) 32 CNOUT1 Output Signal (DO) 32 Example of Connection
1 COMMON 0 20 X0.0 *DEC1 1 OV 20 Y0.0 (For 24V COMMOM)
2 X0.1 *HSKIP 21 X0.2 *DEC2 2 Y0.1 21 Y0.2 AVR
3 X0.3 *EMG 22 X0.4 *DEC3 3 Y0.3 22 Y0.4 DIO3 Board NO.1
4 X0.5 *ELS 23 X0.6 *DEC4 4 Y0.5 23 Y0.6 CNIN1-1
5 X0.7 24 COMMON 1 5 Y0.7 24 0V 0V 24V
6 X1.0 *DEC5 25 X1.1 6 Y1.0 25 Y1.1
*DEC1 X0.0 CNIN1-20
7 X1.2 *DEC6 26 X1.3 7 Y1.2 26 Y1.3
8 X1.4 *DEC7 27 X1.5 8 Y1.4 27 Y1.5
*HSKIP X0.1 CNIN1-2
9 X1.6 *DEC8 28 X1.7 9 Y1.6 28 Y1.7
10 COMMON 2 29 X2.0 *DEC9 10 0V 29 Y2.0
11 X2.1 30 X2.2 *DEC10 11 Y2.1 30 Y2.2 *DEC2 X0.2 CNIN1-21
12 X2.3 31 X2.4 *DEC11 12 Y2.3 31 Y2.4
13 X2.5 32 X2.6 *DEC12 13 Y2.5 32 Y2.6 *EMG X0.3 CNIN1-3
14 X2.7 33 COMMON 3 14 Y2.7 33 0V
15 X3.0 *DEC13 34 X3.1 15 Y3.0 34 Y3.1 *DEC3 X0.4 CNIN1-22
16 X3.2 *DEC14 35 X3.3 16 Y3.2 35 Y3.3
17 COMMON 4 36 X3.4 *DEC15 17 0V 36 Y3.4 *ELS X0.5 CNIN1-4
18 X3.5 37 X3.6 *DEC16 18 Y3.5 37 Y3.6
19 X3.7 19 Y3.7 *DEC4 X0.6 CNIN1-23
* EMG: Emergency Stop Signal * ELS : Emergency Stop Limit Switch Signal
* DEC1,2,3,4 ~ 16 : Speed Reduction Start Signal for Home R* HSKIP : Rapid Skip Signal X0.7 CNIN1-5
Note) *DEC signal and *HSKIP signal of the unused axis can be used arbitrarily.
CNIO1 Input Signal(DI)16 / Output Signal(DO)16 CNIN1-24

1 COMMON 0 20 X4.0
2 X4.1 21 X4.2
*DEC5 X1.0 CNIN1-6
3 X4.3 22 X4.4
4 X4.5 23 X4.6
5 X4.7 24 COMMON 1 X1.1 CNIN1-25
6 X114.0 25 X114.1
7 X114.2 26 X114.3 *DEC6 X1.2 CNIN1-7
8 X114.4 27 X114.5
9 X114.6 28 X114.7 X1.3 CNIN1-26
10 0V 29 Y4.0
11 Y4.1 30 Y4.2 *DEC7 X1.4 CNIN1-8
12 Y4.3 31 Y4.4
13 Y4.5 32 Y4.6 X1.5 CNIN1-27
14 Y4.7 33 0V
15 Y412.0 34 Y412.1 *DEC8 X1.6 CNIN1-9
16 Y412.2 35 Y412.3
17 0V 36 Y412.4 X1.7 CNIN1-28
18 Y412.5 37 Y412.6
19 Y412.7
DV Example of Connection
Y0.0 CNOUT1-20
RELAY
0V
Y0.1 CNOUT1-2
DV RELAY
Y0.2 CNOUT1-21
DV RELAY
Y0.3 CNOUT1-3
DV RELAY
Y0.4 CNOUT1-22
DV RELAY
Y0.5 CNOUT1-4
DV RELAY
Y0.6 CNOUT1-23
DV RELAY
Y0.7 CNOUT1-5
DV RELAY
Y1.0 CNOUT1-6
DV RELAY
Y1.1 CNOUT1-25
DV RELAY
Y1.2 CNOUT1-7
DV RELAY
Y1.3 CNOUT1-26
DV RELAY
Y1.4 CNOUT1-8
DV RELAY
Y1.5 CNOUT1-27
DV RELAY
Y1.6 CNOUT1-9
DV RELAY
Y1.7 CNOUT1-28
DV RELAY
CNOUT1-1,24,10,33,17 AVR
0V
0V 24V
9-2
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List
3. RIO1 Board I/O Signal List

RIO1 Board NO.1 RIO1 Board NO.1 OPCN3
OPCN3 OPERATOR'S PANEL Input Signal OPCN4 OPERATOR'S PANEL Input Signal
1 LG 20 OPOUT03 1 LG 20 OPOUT07 -3 OPOUT00
2 OPOUT02 21 OPOUT01 2 OPOUT06 21 OPOUT05
3 OPOUT00 22 X103.7 3 OPOUT04 22 X107.7 -19 X100.0
4 X102.7 23 X101.7 4 X106.7 23 X105.7
5 X100.7 24 X103.6 5 X104.7 24 X107.6
-17 X100.1
6 X102.6 25 X101.6 6 X106.6 25 X105.6
7 X100.6 26 X103.5 7 X104.6 26 X107.5
8 X102.5 27 X101.5 8 X106.5 27 X105.5 -15 X100.2
9 X100.5 28 X103.4 9 X104.5 28 X107.4
10 X102.4 29 X101.4 10 X106.4 29 X105.4 -13 X100.3
11 X100.4 30 X103.3 11 X104.4 30 X107.3
12 X102.3 31 X101.3 12 X106.3 31 X105.3
-11 X100.4
13 X100.3 32 X103.2 13 X104.3 32 X107.2
14 X102.2 33 X101.2 14 X106.2 33 X105.2
15 X100.2 34 X103.1 15 X104.2 34 X107.1 -9 X100.5
16 X102.1 35 X101.1 16 X106.1 35 X105.1
17 X100.1 36 X103.0 17 X104.1 36 X107.0 -7 X100.6
18 X102.0 37 X101.0 18 X106.0 37 X105.0
19 X100.0 19 X104.0
-5 X100.7
OPCN1 OPERATOR'S PANEL Output Signal OPCN2 OPERATOR'S PANEL Output Signal
1 Y100.0 20 Y100.1 1 Y104.0 20 Y104.1 -21 OPOUT01
2 Y100.2 21 Y100.3 2 Y104.2 21 Y104.3
3 Y100.4 22 Y100.5 3 Y104.4 22 Y104.5
-37 X101.0
4 Y100.6 23 Y100.7 4 Y104.6 23 Y104.7
5 Y101.0 24 Y101.1 5 Y105.0 24 Y105.1
6 Y101.2 25 Y101.3 6 Y105.2 25 Y105.3 -35 X101.1
7 Y101.4 26 Y101.5 7 Y105.4 26 Y105.5
8 Y101.6 27 Y101.7 8 Y105.6 27 Y105.7 -33 X101.2
9 Y102.0 28 Y102.1 9 Y106.0 28 Y106.1
10 Y102.2 29 Y102.3 10 Y106.2 29 Y106.3
-31 X101.3
11 Y102.4 30 Y102.5 11 Y106.4 30 Y106.5
12 Y102.6 31 Y102.7 12 Y106.6 31 Y106.7
13 Y103.0 32 Y103.1 13 Y107.0 32 Y107.1 -29 X101.4
14 Y103.2 33 Y103.3 14 Y107.2 33 Y107.3
15 Y103.4 34 Y103.5 15 Y107.4 34 Y107.5 -27 X101.5
16 Y103.6 35 Y103.7 16 Y107.6 35 Y107.7 AVR
17 0V 36 0V 17 0V 36 0V
TB2 24V -25 X101.6
18 0V 37 0V 18 0V 37 0V 24V
19 0V 19 0V TB1 0V
0V -23 X101.7
OPCN1 OPCN2 OPCN3 OPCN4
Dsub37P Dsub37P Dsub37P Dsub37P
RIO1 Board NO.1

OPCN1
LED LAMP
-1 Y100.0
0V
LAMP
-20 Y100.1
DV
-2 Y100.2
DV
-21 Y100.3
DV
-3 Y100.4
DV
-22 Y100.5
DV
-4 Y100.6
DV
-23 Y100.7
DV
LED LAMP
-5 Y101.0
DV
LAMP
-24 Y101.1
DV
-6 Y101.2
DV
-25 Y101.3
DV
-7 Y101.4
DV
-26 Y101.5
DV
-8 Y101.6
DV
-27 Y101.7
DV
24V TB2
24V
0V TB1
0V
9-3
Appendix
4. Other Input/Output Signals 5. Connection of AC Power

MAIN UNIT MAIN UNIT DKU
DIO3 Board NO.1 0.75 or Greater (Display Keyboard
CNACOUT CABLE ACOUT UNIT)
CNIN1
*EMG AC220VH -6 ACIN
-3 Emergency Stop Signal Input
X0.3 AC220VN -5 ACIN Power UNIT
E -4 (*)
CNIN1 RELEASE S/W FG
*ELS
-4 Emergency Stop Limit Switch
X0.5
CNIN1 Signal Input and Release
(*) represents twisted-pair Power Unit for FDD
-1
cable ACIN (SMPS)
ACIN
FG
CNOUT1 AVR
CNACOUT
-1,24,10,33,17 0V Exmaple of AVR) LN50-24
0V COM -3
(FineSuntronix)
0V 24V EON -2 Power ON
SWITCH
CNOUT1
EOF -1 Power OFF
DV MCCON SERVO UNIT POWER ON Signal
RELAY SWITCH
Y.
CNACIN 0.75 or Greater
11 -3 CABLE ACIN AC220V Single
0V
E -2 Phase
10 -1 50/60Hz
Connect to the earth plate of the cabine
6. Connection of 24V Power 7. Connection of MPG

DIO3 Board NO.1,2,3 MAIN UNIT
CNIN1,2,3,CNIO1,2,3 6PIN SHIELD CABLE
COMMON 0V CNMPG1 MPG NO.1
24V +5V -8 +5V
24V AVR
0V -3 0V
24V HA1H -7 A
HA1L -2 A
0V HB1H -6 B
CNOUT1,2,3,CNIO1,2,3 HB1L -1 B
24V (*)
DV RELAY
DV
6PIN SHIELD CABLE
RELAY
CNMPG2 MPG NO.2
RELAY +5V -8 +5V
0V -3 0V
0V 0V
HA2H -7 A
0V
HA2L -2 A
RIO2 Board NO.1,2,3 HB2H -6 B
CNIN11,12,13 HB2L -1 B
COMMON 0V (*)
24V
(*) represents twisted pair cable

CNOUT11,12,13
24V Note) Connect MPG NO.3 to CNMPG3. Wiring is the same as NO.1,2.
DV RELAY
RELAY
0V 0V
0V
24V TB2 24V
0V TB1 0V
RIO1 Board NO.1,2

OPCN1,2,5,6
24V
DV
0V 0V
0V
24V TB2 24V
0V TB1 0V
9-4
8. FDD Connection
8. FDD Connection 9. RS232C INTERFACE

MAIN UNIT FD BOX Connecting to punch panel
CABLE COM1
CABLE FDD FDC Board MAIN UNIT SHIELD CABLE PUNCH PANEL
CNCOM1 COM1
RX CNCOM2-2 CN1-2 RD2 CD (DCD) 1 8 CD (DCD)
TX CNCOM2-3 CN1-3 SD2 RD (RXD) 2 3 RD (RXD)
RTS CNCOM2-7 CN1-7 RS2 SD (TXD) 3 2 SD (TXD)
CTS CNCOM2-8 CN1-8 CS2 ER (DTR) 4 (*) 20 ER (DTR)

GND CNCOM2-5 CN1-5 LG
(*) SG (GND) 5 7 SG (GND)
4P TWIST PAIR
SHIELD CABLE DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR)
Power Unit for FDD RS (RTS) 7 4 RS (RTS)

CABLE ACOUT (SMPS)
0.75 or Greater Screw Terminal CS (CTS) 8 5 CS (CTS)
AC220VH CNACOUT-6 ACIN
RI (RI) 9 (*) 22 RI (RI)
AC220VN CNACOUT-5 ACIN
(*) FG
FG
E CNACOUT-4
(Connector Metal Part)
Dsub 9PIN Dsub 25PIN
MALE (*) represents twisted pair cable FEMALE
DKU
(DISPLAY KEYBOARD UNIT)
Power Unit
Screw Terminal
(*)
ACIN
ACIN
CABLE FDDPWR
0.75 or Greater
FG
(*) represents twist pair cable
Direct Connection to PC Connect to PC through Punch Panel

MAIN UNIT PC PANCH PANEL PC
CNCOM1 CABLE PC COM1,COM2 COM1 CABLE PC COM1,COM2
CD (DCD) 1 SHIELD CABLE 1 CD (DCD) CD (DCD) 8 SHIELD CABLE 1 CD (DCD)
RD (RXD) 2 2 RD (RXD) RD (RXD) 3 2 RD (RXD)
SD (TXD) 3 3 SD (TXD) SD (TXD) 2 3 SD (TXD)
ER (DTR) 4 (*) 4 ER (DTR) ER (DTR) 20 (*) 4 ER (DTR)
SG (GND) 5 5 SG (GND) SG (GND) 7 5 SG (GND)
DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR) DR (DSR) 6 6 DR (DSR)
RS (RTS) 7 7 RS (RTS) RS (RTS) 4 7 RS (RTS)
CS (CTS) 8 8 CS (CTS) CS (CTS) 5 8 CS (CTS)
RI 9 (*) 9 RI RI 22 (*) 9 RI
FG FG
(Connector Metal Part) (Connector Metal Part)
Dsub 9PIN MAX. 15m Dsub 9PIN Dsub 25PIN MAX. 15m Dsub 9PIN
MALE MALE FEMALE MALE
(*) represents twisted pair cable (*) represents twisted pair cable
Note) In case the cable length is 10m or greater, or in DNC operation, Note) In case the cable length is 10m or greater, or in DNC operation,
make a twisted pair with signal cable (RD,SD,RS,CS) and ground cable (SG,GND). make a twisted pair with signal cable (RD,SD,RS,CS) and ground cable (SG,GND).
9-5
Appendix
10. LAN INTERFACE 11. Connection to SENTROL2 MAIN

UNIT and DKU
RJ-45 PLUG PC MAIN UNIT CABLE CND1 DKU
(LAN CARD) SHIELD CABLE(Note 1) (Display Keyboard Unit)
R CND1-1 CND1-1 R
R-GND CND1-6 CND1-6 R-GND
G CND1-2 CND1-2 G
MAIN UNIT
G-GND CND1-7 CND1-7 G-GND
RJ-45 PLUG NETWORK HUB
B CND1-3 CND1-3 B
CNLAN
B-GND CND1-8 CND1-8 B-GND
1 TD+ ORG/WHT 1 TD+ ORG/WHT
MONID0 CND1-11 CND1-11 MONID0
2 TD- ORG 2 TD- ORG
MONID1 CND1-12 CND1-12 MONID1
3 RD+ GRN/WHT RJ-45 PLUG RJ-45 PLUG 3 RD+ GRN/WHT
HSYNC CND1-13 CND1-13 HSYNC
4 BLU 4 BLU
CABLE CNLAN BLU/WHT VSYNC CND1-14 CND1-14 VSYNC
5 BLU/WHT 5
6 RD- GRN (STRAIGHT CABLE) 6 RD- GRN GND CND1-5 CND1-5 GND
7 BRN/WHT 7 BRN/WHT GND CND1-10 CND1-10 GND
8 BRN 8 BRN FG (Connector Metal Part) (Connector Metal Part) FG

(Note 2) (Note 2)
MAIN UNIT CABLE CND2

CNLAN CABLE CNLAN NETWORK HUB SHIELD CABLE(Note 1)
CATEGORY5 SHIELD TYPE LAN CABLE CLOCK CND2-1 CND2-1 CLOCK
TD+ ORG/WH 1 1 TD+ ORG/WHT GND CND2-5 CND2-5 DATA
TD- ORG 2 2 TD- ORG DATA CND2-2 CND2-2 SPEAKER+
RD+ GRN/WH 3 3 RD+ GRN/WHT GND CND2-3 CND2-3 SPEAKER-
BLU 4 4 BLU SPEAKER+ CND2-6 CND2-6 VCC
BLU/WHT5 5 BLU/WHT GND CND2-8 CND2-8 GND
RD- GRN 6 6 RD- GRN SPEAKER- CND2-7 CND2-7
BRN/WHT7 7 BRN/WHT GND CND2-9 CND2-9
BRN 8 8 BRN FG (Connector Metal Part) (*) (Connector Metal Part) FG
(Note 2) (Note 2)
0.75 or Greater
RJ-45 PLUG MAX. 15m RJ-45 PLUG CNACOUT CABLE ACOUT Power Unit
AC220VH -6 ACIN
AC220VN -5 ACIN
BRN 8 BRN 8 E -4 (*)
BRN/WHT 7 BRN/WHT 7 FG
GRN 6 GRN 6
BLU/WHT 5 BLU/WHT 5
BLU 4 BLU 4 (Note 1) To cope with noise, attach ferrite Power Unit for FDD
GRN/WHT 3 GRN/WHT 3 core on both ends of the cable. (SMPS)
ORG 2 ORG 2 FERRITE CORE ACIN
ORG/WHT 1 ORG/WHT 1
MAKER:TDK ZCAT2132-1130-M ACIN
(Note 2) Connect cable shield to connector's FG
metal part only, not GND PIN
(to cope with noise)
(*) represents twisted pair cable
9-6
12. AC SERVO Connection
12.1 YASKAWA SIGMA
12. Connecting to SENTROL2 and AC SERVO
12.1 Connecting to YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMA SERIES AC SERVO

MAIN UNIT(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2) YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMA MAIN UNIT YASKAWA SIGMA/SIGMA
CABLE AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA1,2,3 1CN CNA1,2,3,5,6,7 SHIELD CABLE 1CN
1 AG 14 VCMD CNA4,5,6 1 SG 26
2 15 +24V HP50V 2 SG 27 +24V
15 47 +24VIN SERVO ON
3 16 ENBLB Dsub25P (3M50F) 3 28
Input Signal
ENBLB 16 40 S-ON
4 17 ENBLA 4 29 S-RDY+ SERVO
5 PZH 18 PRDYB 5 V-REF 30 S-RDY- ON ENBLA 17 Counterclockwise
ON 20 43 N-OT Rotation Inhibit
6 PZL 19 PRDYA 6 SG 31 ALM+
Iniput Signal
7 PBH 20 0V 7 32 ALM- 0V
CLOCKWISE
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 33 PAO 42 P-OT ROTATION Inhibit
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 34 *PAO Input Signal
1
10 PAL 23 0V 10 35 PBO
11 24 COMMON 11 36 *PBO SG
COMMON24
12 AL2 25 AL1 12 37
13 AL0 13 38 31 ALM+
SERVO SERVO ALARM
OVL
14 39 ALARM SALM 21 32 ALM- --> OFF
15 40 S-ON 29 S-RDY+
SERVO SERVO READY
16 41 *VRD SRDY 22 30 S-RDY-
READY --> ON
17 42 P-OT
18 43 N-OT
19 PCO 44
20 *PCO 45

ANALOG
21 46 VCMD 14 5 V-REF
Speed Command ANALOG
22 47 +24VIN Voltage Output 1 6 SG Speed Command Voltage
23 48 AG Input
24 49
25 50

MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) HP20V
PAH 9 33 PAO
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) (3M20F) 2CN ENCODER ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input PAL 10 34 *PAO Phase A Signal Output
1 PG0V 11
CABLE 2 PG0V 12 PBH 7 35 PBO
ENCODER ENCODER
2CNX-A 3 PG0V 13 Phase B Signal Input PBL 8 36 *PBO Phase B Signal Output
2CNY-A 4 PG5V 14 PC PZH 5 19 PCO
ENCODER
2CNZ-A 5 PG5V 15 *PC Phase Z Signal Input PZL 6 20 *PCO ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Output
2CNA-A 6 PG5V 16 PA
23 2
7 17 *PA
AC SERVO MOTOR 8 18 PB 0V SG
9 19 *PB
10 20 FG
Connect to the Earth

Plate of the Cabinet
YASKAWA SIGMA CABLE 2CNX,2CNY,2CNZ,2CNA MOTOR ENCODER

AC SERVO UNIT SHIELD CABLE
2CN
PA 16 A
*PA 17 B
PB 18 C
*PB 19 D
PG
PC 14 E
*PC 15 F
PG5V 4 H
PG5V 5
PG5V 6
PG0V 1 G
PG0V 2
PG0V 3
FG 20 J
represents twisted pair cable
9-7
Appendix
12.2 Connection with LG AC SERVO(FDA-5000/6000)

MAIN UNIT(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2) CABLE LG FDA-5000/6000 MAIN UNIT LG FDA-5000/6000
CNA1,2,3 AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA4,5,6 CN1 CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN1
1 AG 14 VCMD HP50V 1 GND 26 GND
+24V
2 15 +24V Dsub25P (3M50F) 2 27 SPDIN 15 49 +24VIN SERVO ON
3 16 ENBLB 3 28 ENBLB 16 18 SVONEN Input Signal
SERVO ON
4 17 ENBLA 4 29 --> ON ENBLA 17 Counterclockwise
5 PZH 18 5 PZO 30 /PZO 15 CCWLIM Rotation Inhibit
Iniput Signal
6 PZL 19 6 PB0 31 /PBO
7 PBH 20 0V 7 PAO 32 /PAO ALARM
PRDYB 18 38 ALMRST
POWER RESET
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 33 PRDYA 19
READY CLOCKWISE
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 34 40 CWLIM ROTATION
10 PAL 23 0V 10 35 I hibit I t
Emergency
11 24 COMMON 11 36 39 ESTOP Stop Input
12 25 12 37 24 Signal
13 13 38 COMMON 24 GND2
14 39
SERVO
15 CCWLIM40 CWLIM *OVL ALAR SALM 21 20 ALARM
16 41 M SERVO ALARM
--> OFF
17 42 VRD
SERVO
READY SRDY 22 25 GND24
18 SVONEN43
20
19 44
0V
20 ALARM 45

21 46 ANALOG
VCMD 14 27 SPDIN ANALOG
22 47 Speed Command
Voltage Output 1 1 GND Speed Command
23 48 V lt I t
A
24 GND24V49 +24VIN

25 GND24V50
PAH 9 6 PBO
ENCODER ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input PAL 10 31 /PBO Phase B Signal Output
CN2
PBH 7 7 PAO
1 PW 11 /PZ ENCODER ENCODER
Phase B Signal Input PBL 8 32 /PAO Phase A Signal Output
2 /PW 12 FG
PZH 5 5 PZO
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) HP20V 3 PV 13 /PB ENCODER ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Input PZL 6 30 /PZO Phase Z Signal Output
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) (3M20F) 4 /PV 14 PZ
23 26
5 PU 15 /PA
CABLE 6 /PU 16 PB 0V GN
CN2X-A 7 17
CN2Y-A 8 18 PA Connect to the Earth
CN2Z-A 9 0V 19 5V represents twisted pair cable
CN2A-A 10 20
AC SERVO MOTOR
(A) When connecting FLANGE SIZE 60,80 MOTOR and FDA 5000
LG AC SERVO UNIT 20PIN SHIELD CABLE OPTICAL ENCODER

PA CN2-18 1
/PA CN2-15 2
PB CN2-16 3
/PB CN2-13 4
PZ CN2-14 5
/PZ CN2-11 6
PU CN2-5 7
/PU CN2-6 8
PG
PV CN2-3 9
/PV CN2-4 10
PW CN2-1 11
/PW CN2-2 12
+5V CN2-19 13
0V CN2-9 14

FG CN2-12 15
(B) Connecting FLANGE SIZE 130,180 MOTOR and FDA 5000
LG AC SERVO UNIT 20PIN SHIELD CABLE OPTICAL ENCODER

PA CN2-18 A
/PA CN2-15 B
PB CN2-16 C
/PB CN2-13 D
PZ CN2-14 E
/PZ CN2-11 F
PU CN2-5 K
/PU CN2-6 L
PG
PV CN2-3 M
/PV CN2-4 N
PW CN2-1 P
/PW CN2-2 R
+5V CN2-19 H
0V CN2-9 G

FG CN2-12 J
9-8
12. AC SERVO Connection
12.3 HYOSUNG/YASKAWA
12.3 Connection with HYOSUNG/YASKAWA AC SERVO

MAIN UNIT Hyosung/YASKAWA AC SERVO UNIT MAIN UNIT Hyosung/YASKAWA
(EPS3/4 Board NO.1,2) CABLE EPS3/EPS4 Board NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA1,2,3 1CN CNA1,2,3,5,6,7 SHIELD CABLE 1CN
1 AG 14 VCMD CNA4,5,6 1 SG 33 PAO
+24V
2 15 +24V Dsub25P H50F 2 19 PCO 34 *PAO
15 7 +24VIN SERVO ON
3 16 ENBLB 3 20 *PCO 35 PBO Input Signal
ENBLB 16 8 S-ON
4 17 ENBLA 4 21 36 *PBO SERVO ON
--> ON ENBLA 17 Counterclockwise
5 PZH 18 5 22 37
20 26 N-OT Rotation Inhibit
6 PZL 19 6 23 38 ALM+
Iniput Signal
7 PBH 20 0V 7 +24VIN 24 39 ALM- 0V
Power Failure
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 S-ON 25 40 41 P-OT
Inhibit Input
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 26 N-OT 41 P-OT 32 Signal
10 PAL 23 0V 10 27 S-RDY- 42
17
11 24 COMMON 11 28 S-RDY+ 43
COMMON 24 SG
12 25 12 IN-A 29 44
38 ALM+
13 13 SG-A 30 45 SERVO SERVO ALARM
OV SALM 21 39 ALM-
14 IN-B 31 46 ALARM --> OFF
15 SG-B 32 SG 47 28 S-RDY+
SERVO SERVO READY
16 48 *VRD SRDY 22 27 S-RDY- --> ON
READY
17 SG 49
18 50

ANALOG
VCMD 14 14 IN-B
2CN Speed Command
Voltage Output 1 15 SG-B ANALOG
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) 1 0P 14 PC
Speed Command
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) H20F 2 0P 8 PU 15 *PC A 12 IN-A Voltage Input
3 0P 9 *PU 16 PA 13 SG-A
CABLE 4 +5P 10 PV 17 *PA
2CNX-A 5 +5P 11 *PV 18 PB
PAH 9 33 PAO
2CNY-A 6 +5P 12 PW 19 *PB ENCODER ENCODER
Phase A Signal Input PAL 10 34 *PAO Phase A Signal Output
2CNZ-A 7 13 *PW 20 FG
PBH 7 35 PBO
2CNA-A ENCODER ENCODER
Phase B Signal Input PBL 8 36 *PBO Phase B Signal Output
AC SERVO MOTOR PZH 5 19 PCO
ENCODER ENCODER
Phase Z Signal Input PZL 6 20 *PCO Phase Z Signal Output
23 1
0V SG
Connect to the Earth

Hyosung/YASKAWA CABLE 2CNX,2CNY,2CNZ,2CNA OPTICAL ENCODER

2CN
PA 16 A
*PA 17 B
PB 18 C
*PB 19 D
PC 14 E
*PC 15 F
PU 8 K
PG
*PU 9 L
PV 10 M
*PV 11 N
PW 12 P
*PW 13 R
+5P 4 H
0P 1 G
+5P 5
0P 2
+5P 6
0P 3
FG 20 J

9-9
APPENDIX
12.4 CONNECTION WITH PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES AC SERVO

MAIN UNIT CABLE PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES MAIN UNIT PANASONIC MINAS A SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2) CNA1,2,3 AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA4,5,6 CN I/F CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN I/F
1 AG 14 VCMD HP50V 1 26 ZEROSPD
+24V
2 15 +24V Dsub25P (3M50F) 2 27 15 7 COM+
SERVO ON
3 16 ENBLB 3 28 ENBLB16 29 SRV-ON INPUT SIGNAL
4 17 ENBLA 4 29 SRV-ON SERVO ON
--> ON ENBLA17 COUNTERCLOCK
5 PZH 18 5 30
9 CCWL
WISE ROTATION
INHIBIT INIPUT
6 PZL 19 6 31 SIGNAL
7 PBH 20 0V 7 COM+ 32 C-MODE ALARM
RESET
PRDYB18 8 CWL
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 CWL 33 POWER
CLOCKWISE
PRDYA19
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 CCWL 34 S-RDY- READY ROTATION
26 ZEROSPD INHIBIT INPUT
10 PAL 23 0V 10 35 S-RDY+ SIGNAL
11 24 COMMON 11 36 ALM- EMERGENCY
12 25 12 37 ALM+ 32 C-MODE STOP INPUT
SIGNAL
13 13 38
14 SPR/TRQR 39 COMMON24
SERVO
15 GND 40 *OVL ALARM SALM 21 37 ALM+
SERVO ALARM
16 41 COM- 36 ALM- --> OFF
SERVO
17 42 VRD READY SRDY 22 35 S-RDY+
SERVO READY
18 43 34 S-RDY- --> ON
19 44 20 41 COM-
20 45
0V
21 OA+ 46 ANALOG

SPEED
22 OA- 47
COMMAND VCMD 14 14 SPR/TRQR ANALOG
23 OZ+ 48 OB+ VOLTAGE SPEED COMMAND
1 15 GND
24 OZ- 49 OB- OUTPUT VOLTAGE INPUT
A
25 50 FG

ENCODER PAH 9 48 OB+ ENCODER
FOLLOWING CONNECTORS ARE USED CN SIG PHASE A SIGNAL PHASE B SIGNAL
INPUT PAL 10 49 OB-
FOR MOTORS WITH 1KW OR HIGHER CAPACITY 1 0V 11 OUTPUT
ENCODER PBH 7 21 OA+ ENCODER
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) 2 0V 12 PHASE B SIGNAL
PBL 8 22 OA-
PHASE A SIGNAL
INPUT OUTPUT
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) HP20V 3 +5V 13 PZH 5 23 OZ+
ENCODER ENCODER
(3M20F) 4 +5V 14 PHASE Z SIGNAL PZL 6 24 OZ- PHASE Z SIGNAL
INPUT OUTPUT
5 BATT+ 15 23 50
CABLE 6 BATT- 16
0V FG
CN SIGX 7 17 RX/TX
CN SIGY 8 18 -RX/-TX CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
CN SIGZ 9 19 REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE OF THE CABINET
CN SIGA 10 20 FG
AC SERVO MOTOR
CABLE CN SIGX,CN SIGY

PANASONIC MINAS A CABLE CN SIGX,CN SIGY MOTOR ENCODER
CN SIG
BATT+ 5 T
BATT- 6 S
RX/TX 17 K
-RX/-TX 18 L
PG
+5V 4 H
0V 2 G
+5V 3
0V 1

FG 20 J
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
9-10
12. AC SERVO CONNECTION
12.5 MITSUBISHI MR-J2
12.5 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES AC SERVO

MAIN UNIT CABLE MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES MAIN UNIT MITSUBISHI MR-J2 SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2) CNA1,2,3 AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA4,5,6 CN1B CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN1B
1 AG 14 VCMD HP20V 1 LG 11 3 VDD +24V
2 15 +24V Dsub25P (3M20F) 2 VC 12 13 COM SERVO ON

PRDYB18 5 SON INPUT SIGNAL
3 16 ENBLB 3 VDD 13 COM POWER
4 17 ENBLA 4 14 READY PRDYA19 POWER FAILURE
COMMAND INPUT
5 PZH 18 PRDYB 5 SON 15 EMG ENBLB16 8 ST1 SIGNAL
SERVO ON
6 PZL 19 PRDYA 6 16 LSP --> ON ENBLA17 COUNTERCLOCKWI
SE ROTATION
7 PBH 20 0V 7 17 LSN 20 17 LSN INHIBIT INIPUT
SIGNAL
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 ST1 18 ALM 0V CLOCKWISE
ROTATION
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 19 16 LSP INHIBIT INPUT
SIGNAL
10 PAL 23 0V 10 SG 20 SG
EMERGENCY STOP
11 24 COMMON 15 EMG INPUT SIGNAL
12 25 CN1A +24V
10
13 1 11 15 20
2 12 COMMON24 SG
SERVO
3 13 *OVL ALARM SALM 21 18 ALM SERVO
ALARM
HP20V 4 14 --> OFF
(3M20F) 5 LZ 15 LZR ANALOG SG
6 LA 16 LAR SPEED VCMD 14 2 VC

ANALOG
COMMAND
7 LB 17 LBR VOLTAGE 1 1 LG SPEED COMMAND
HC-SF,HC-RF SERIES MOTOR 8 18 OUTPUT A VOLTAGE INPUT
MS3106B20-29S (PLUG) 9 19 RD
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) 10 20 SG CN1A
SERVO
VRD SRDY 22 19 RD
READY
SERVO READY
--> ON
SG
CN2 ENCODER PAH 9 7 LB ENCODER
1 LG 11 PHASE A
PAL 10 17 LBR
PHASE B SIGNAL
SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT
CABLE 2 LG 12 LG PBH 7 6 LA
ENCODER ENCODER
CN2X HP20V 3 13 PHASE B PBL 8 16 LAR PHASE A SIGNAL
SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT
AC SERVO MOTOR CN2Y (3M20F) 4 14 PZH 5 5 LZ
ENCODER ENCODER
CN2Z 5 15 PHASE Z PZL 6 15 LZR PHASE Z SIGNAL
SIGNAL INPUT OUTPUT
HC-MF,HC-UF,HA-FF SERIES MOTORCN2A 6 16 23 20
1-172161-9 (MAKER:AMP) 7 MR 17 MRR 0V SG
8 18 P5
9 BAT 19
CONNECT TO THE EARTH
10 20 P5 REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE PLATE OF THE CABINET
AC SERVO MOTOR
A) FOR HC-SF,HC-RF SERIES MOTOR

CABLE CN2X,CN2Y
MITSUBISHI MR-J2 CABLE CN2Z,CN2A MOTOR ENCODER
CN SIG
BAT 9 NOTE) F
LG 1 G
MR 7 C
MRR 17 D
PG
P5 18 S
LG 2 R
P5 20
LG 12

GROUND PLATE N

NOTE) CONNECT BAT SIGNAL FOR ABSOLUTE SYSTEM ONLY
B) FOR HC-MF,HC-UF,HA-FF SERIES MOTOR

CABLE CN2X,CN2Y
MITSUBISHI MR-J2 CABLE CN2Z,CN2A MOTOR ENCODER
CN SIG
BAT 9 NOTE) 3 BT
LG 1
MR 7 1 MR
MRR 17 2 MRR
PG
P5 18 7 P5
LG 2 8 LG
P5 20
LG 12

GROUND PLATE 9 SHD

NOTE) CONNECT BAT SIGNAL FOR ABSOLUTE SYSTEM ONLY
9-11
APPENDIX
12.6 CONNECTION WITH DAEWOO M SERIES AC SERVO

1) IF SERVO UNIT CONNECTOR IS HALF PITCH CONNECTOR (3M)
MAIN UNIT CABLE DAEWOO M SERIES MAIN UNIT DAEWOO M SERIES
AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2) CNA1,2,3 CN1 CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN1
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CNA4,5,6 1 24GND 19
+24V
1 AG 14 VCMD HP36V 2 20
SERVO ON
2 15 +24V Dsub25P (3M36F) 3 21 SVON/ ENBLB16 21 SVON/ INPUT SIGNAL
3 16 ENBLB 4 22 P-OT SERVO ON
ENBLA17 COUNTERCLOCK
--> ON
4 17 ENBLA 5 23 N-OT WISE ROTATION
23 N-OT INHIBIT INIPUT
5 PZH 18 6 24
SIGNAL
CLOCKWISE
6 PZL 19 7 COM1/ 25
22 P-OT ROTATION
7 PBH 20 0V 8 ALM 26 +24V INHIBIT INPUT
15 1 SIGNAL
8 PBL 21 SALM 9 PLA 27
COMMON24 24GND
9 PAH 22 SRDY 10 PLA/ 28 PLB
10 PAL 23 0V 11 29 PLB/ SERVO
*OVL SALM 21 8 ALM
11 24 COMMON 12 30 PLZ ALARM
SERVO ALARM
12 25 13 31 PLZ/ 7 COM1/ --> OFF
SERVO
13 14 32 DGND VRD READY SRDY 22
15 33 20
16 34 0V
17 VELCMD35 ANALOG
18 VELCMD/ 36 SPEED
VCMD 14 17 VELCMD ANALOG
COMMAND
VOLTAGE 1 18 VELCMD/ SPEED COMMAND
OUTPUT VOLTAGE INPUT
A
CN2
1 +5VE 11 DGND PAH 9 9 PLA ENCODER
ENCODER
2 +5VE 12 DGND PAL 10 10 PLA/ PHASE B SIGNAL
PHASE A SIGNAL
OUTPUT
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) HP20V 3 +5VE 13 DGND INPUT
PBH 7 28 PLB
ENCODER
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) (3M20F) 4 14 PU ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL
PHASE B SIGNAL PBL 8 29 PLB/
5 PA 15 PU/ INPUT OUTPUT
PZH 5 30 PLZ
CABLE 6 PA/ 16 PV ENCODER ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL PZL 6 31 PLZ/ PHASE Z SIGNAL
CN2X-A 7 PB 17 PV/ INPUT OUTPUT
23 32
CN2Y-A 8 PB/ 18 PW
0V DGN
CN2Z-A 9 PZ 19 PW/
CN2A-A 10 PZ/ 20 FG
AC SERVO MOTOR CONNECT TO THE EARTH

REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE PLATE OF THE CABINET
2) IF SERVO UNIT CONNECTOR IS HONDA CONNECTOR

MAIN UNIT DAEWOO M SERIES MAIN UNIT DAEWOO M SERIES
(EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2) AC SERVO UNIT EPS3/EPS4 BOARD NO.1,2 CABLE CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 AC SERVO UNIT
CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 CABLE CN1 CNA1,2,3,4,5,6 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN1
1 AG 14 VCMD CNA1,2,3 1 PLA 26 +24V
2 SERVO ON INPUT
15 +24V CNA4,5,6 2 PLA/ 27 ALM
ENBLB 16 31 SVON/ SIGNAL
3 16 ENBLB Dsub25P H50F 3 28 ALM/ SERVO ON
ENBLA 17
--> ON COUNTERCLOCKWIS
4 17 ENBLA 4 29 47 N-OT E ROTATION INHIBIT
INIPUT SIGNAL
5 PZH 18 5 30
6 PZL 19 6 31 SVON/ +24V
48 P-OT CLOCKWISE
ROTATION INHIBIT
7 PBH 20 0V 7 32 24GND 15 32 INPUT SIGNAL
8 PBL 21 SALM 8 33 PLZ COMMON 24 45

24GND
9 PAH 22 SRDY 9 SG 34 PLZ/ SERVO
*OVL ALARM SALM 21 27 ALM
10 PAL 23 0V 10 35 SERVO ALARM
28 ALM/
11 24 COMMON 11 36 SERVO --> OFF
VRD READY SRDY 22
12 25 12 37 VELCMD 20
13 13 38 VELCMD/ 0V
14 39 ANALOG
15 40 SPEED VCMD 14 37 VELCMD ANALOG
COMMAND
16 41 VOLTAGE 1 38 VELCMD/ SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
OUTPUT A
17 42

18 43
ENCODER PAH 9 1 PLA ENCODER
19 PLB 44 PHASE A SIGNAL PHASE B SIGNAL
PAL 10 2 PLA/
OUTPUT
20 PLB/ 45 24GND INPUT
PBH 7 19 PLB
ENCODER ENCODER
21 46 ALMRST/ PHASE B SIGNAL PBL 8 20 PLB/ PHASE A SIGNAL
INPUT OUTPUT
22 47 N-OT PZH 5 33 PLZ
ENCODER
ENCODER
23 48 P-OT PHASE Z SIGNAL PZL 6 34 PLZ/ PHASE Z SIGNAL
INPUT OUTPUT
24 49 23 9
25 50 0V SG
CN2
1 SG 11 PV/ DIO3 BOARD NO.1,2,3 +24V
2 SG 12 PW
EMERGE
MS3108B20-29S (PLUG) 3 SG 13 PW/ 46 ALMRST/ NCY
Y.
MS3057-12A (CABLE CLAMP) H20F 4 +5V 14 PZ
0V
5 +5V 15 PZ/
CNOUT1,2,3
CABLE 6 +5V 16 PA
CN2X-A 7 17 PA/ : DETERMINED BY SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONNECT TO THE EARTH
CN2Y-A 8 PU 18 PB PLATE OF THE CABINET
*EMG
CN2Z-A 9 PU/ 19 PB/ TMRS
TMRB 10 300
CN2A-A 10 PV 20 FG G0.4 R.
TMRS SVRES
AC SERVO MOTOR
SERVO RESET
R. Y. (ALMRST) REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
ADD TO LOW LEVEL SEQUENCE
9-12
12. AC SERVO CONNECTION
12.7 AC220V POWER CONNECTION
12.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN AC SERVO UNIT AND AC 220V POWER

MAIN UINT (DIO3 BOARD)
RELAY
DV CNOUT1-
Y. POW
RELAY MC
0V
OV +24V
OV CNOUT1-1,24,10,33,17
AVR
SPARK
NOTE): THIS VALUE IS DETERMINED BY SEQUENCE PROGRAM KILLER
F7.2 Y.
PLC HIGH LEVEL PROCESSING

AC SERVO UNIT
MC
R
AC 3
220V NF S MAIN CIRCUIT
50/60Hz POWER
T
r
CONTROL
NOTE) POWER
t
NOTE) CONNECT CONTROL POWER WHEN THERE IS A CONNECTOR
9-13
APPENDIX
13. CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTROL2 AND SPINDLE UNIT
13.1 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SG-J SERIES

MAIN UNIT AC SPINDLE UNIT MAIN UNIT AC SPINDLE UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD MITSUBISHI SG-J EPS3/EPS4 BOARD CABLE CNS1 MITSUBISHI SG-J
CNS1 CON1 CNS1 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CON1
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 33 US 6 +24V
SPINDLE
2 DOCOM15 +24V 2 19 34 ZS 12 FC TROUBLE
ALARM
21 11 FA OUTPUT
3 ORC 16 SRN Dsub25P H50F 3 20 35 OUT3 FA
SIGNAL
--> OFF
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
4 +5V 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 4 21 36 (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL
+24V
5 PZH 18 ESP 5 22 RG 37 ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED
22 34 ZS OUTPUT
6 PZL 19 SET 6 +24V 23 CES 38 ZS1 ZERO SPEED
ZS
SIGNAL
--> ON
7 PBH 20 0V 7 SET 24 39 (F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL

ORIENTATION
ORIENTATION
COMPLETE
8 PBL 21 FA 8 +24V 25 IN4 40 ORA 13 35 OUT3 COMPLETE --> ON
ORA1 ORIENT OUTPUT SIGNAL
9 PAH 22 ZS 9 26 41 (F44.4) INPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH SPEED MATCH
10 PAL 23 0V 10 RG 27 42 USC 25 33 US OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
USO SPEED MATCH
11 HSP 24 COMMON 11 FA 28 43 (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL COMMON 24 10
RG
12 25 USC 12 FC 29 44
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT DOCOM 2 8 +24V
13 ORA 13 RG 30 SES 45 SRN *ESP SIGNAL
EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF ESP 18 17 IN5
14 31 SE1 46 SRI (G43.4) INPUT SIGNAL EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
15 32 47 IN7 SET1
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.4) SET 19 7 SET
16 48 COMPLETION --> ON MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION
17 IN5 49 SRN
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
OUTPUT SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL
(G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND --> ON SRN 16 45 SRN

18 50 INPUT SIGNAL CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.5) COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION SRI 17 46 SRI
COMMAND --> ON COUNTERCLOCKWISE
INPUT SIGNAL ROTATION COMMAND
CABLE CNS1P ORC1 ORIENTATION COMMAND OUTPUT INPUT SIGNAL
(G43.7) SIGNAL ORC 3 25 IN4
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON ORIENTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNALL
POSITION CODE HSP RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
RAPID TAPPING --> ON HSP 11 47 IN7
(FOR LATHE) (G42.2) INPUT SIGNAL HIGH SPEED TAPPING
23 CES INPUT SIGNAL
22
20 13
0V RG
ANALOG ANALOG
VCMD 14 31 SE1 SPEED COMMAND
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 30 SES VOLTAGE INPUT
A AG

13.2 CONNECITON WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE SF SERIES
MAIN UNIT AC SPINDLE UNIT MAIN UNIT CABLE CNS1 AC SPINDLE UNIT
EPS3/EPS4 BOARD MITSUBISHI SF EPS3/EPS4 BOARD 20PIN SHIELD CABLE MITSUBISHI SF
CNS1 CON1 CNS1 CON1
+24V
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 33 COMMON 24 6
2 DOCOM15 +24V 2 19 34 SPINDLE
*FA TROUBLE IINPUT
3 ORC 16 SRN Dsub25P H50F 3 ZS1 20 35 (F44.5) SIGNAL FA 21 11 FA SPINDLE
TROUBLE ALARM
4 +5V 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 4 ZS2 21 36 12 FC OUTPUT SIGNAL --> OFF
ZS1 ZERO SPEED
5 PZH 18 ESP 5 22 ORA1 37 (F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL ZS 22 3 ZS1
ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED
6 PZL 19 SET 6 +24V 23 ORA2 38
ORA1
4 ZS2 OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
ORIENTATION
7 PBH 20 0V 7 SET1 24 39 (F44.4) INPUT SIGNAL ORA 13 22 ORA1 ORIENTATION ORIENTATION
COMPLETION COMPLETION
8 PBL 21 FA 8 SET2 25 ORC1 40
USO
23 ORA2
OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
SPEED MATCH
9 PAH 22 ZS 9 US10 26 ORC2 41 (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL USC 25 9 US10
SPEED SPEED MATCH
10 PAL 23 0V 10 DO24 27 42 20 10 MATCHOUTPUT --> ON
SIGNAL
0V DO24
11 24 COMMON 11 FA 28 43
12 25 USC 12 FC 29 44 +24V
13 ORA 13 30 SES 45 SRN *ESP DOCOM 2 48 EPS2
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.4) EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF ESP 18 47 EPS1
14 OS 31 SE1 46 SRI RV EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
MACHINE PREPARATION
15 32 SE2 47 ESP1 SET1 COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.4) COMPLETION --> ON MACHINE PREPARATION
16 48 ESP2 SET 19 7 SET1
RV COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
17 49 SRN OUTPUT SIGNAL
18 50 (G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND SRN 16 45 SRN CLOCKWISE ROTATION

--> ON RV COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.5) SRI 17 46 SRI COUNTERCLOCKWISE
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION RV ROTATION COMMAND
COMMAND --> ON INPUT SIGNAL
CABLE CNS1P ORIENTATION COMMAND OUTPUT
ORCI
SIGNAL ORC 3 25 ORC1 ORIENTATION
(G43.7) ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON RV COMMAND INPUT
POSITION CODE
(FOR LATHE)

ANALOG
VCMD 14 31 SE1 ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 30 SES VOLTAGE INPUT
A 32 SE2
AG

9-14
13. SPINDLE UNIT CONNECTION
13.3 MITSUBISI MDS-A-SPA
13.3 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPA SERIES

EPS3/EPS4 BOARD MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA EPS3/EPS4 BOARD SHIELD CABLE MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA
CNS1 CNS1
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 REDY 11 SRN +24V 15 CN12-20 FC
SPINDLE TROUBLE ALARM
2 DOCOM15 +24V 2 SRI 12 IN1 FA 21 CN12-10 FA OUTPUT SIGNAL --> OFF
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
3 ORC 16 SRN Dsub25P HP20V 3 IN2 13 IN3 (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL CN10-17
ZERO
ZERO SPEED
4 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 CN10 4 14 ZS 22 CN11-7 OUT1 OUTPUT SIGNAL SPEED -->
ZS1 ZERO SPEED ON
5 PZH 18 ESP 5 15 (F44.6) INPUT SIGANL ORIENTATION ORIENTATION
COMPLETE COMPLETE
ORA 13 CN11-17 OUT2
6 PZL 19 SET 6 16 ORA1 ORIENTATION OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
7 PBH 20 0V 7 17 +24V (F44.4) INPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH SPEED MATCH
USC 25 CN11-8 OUT3 OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
8 PBL 21 FA 8 18 USO SPEED MATCH
COMMON 24
9 PAH 22 ZS 9 19 CES1 (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL
20 CN10-10
10 PAL 23 0V 10 20
0V RG
11 HSP 24 COMMON
DOCOM 2
12 25 USC 1 11 *ESP EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT
SIGNAL
(G43.4) ESP 18 CN10-12 IN1
13 ORA HP20V .. .. EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
MACHINE PREPARATION
CN11 7 OUT1 17 OUT2 SET1
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGANL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.4) COMPLETION --> ON
SET 19 CN10-1 REDY
MACHINE PREPARATION
8 OUT3 18 COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
.. .. SRN OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND SRN 16 CN10-11 SRN
CLOCKWISE ROTATION
10 20 --> ON
COMMAND
SRI COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION INPUT SIGNAL
HP20V 1 11 (G43.5)
SRI 17 CN10-2 SRI
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
COMMAND --> ON
CN12 .. .. ROTATION COMMAND
ORIENTATION COMMAND INPUT SIGNAL
ORC1
.. .. OUTPUT SIGNAL
ORC 3 CN10-3 IN2
(G43.7)
ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON ORIENTATION COMMAND
10 FA 20 FC INPUT SIGNAL
HSP RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.2) RAPID TAPPING --> ON HSP 11 CN10-13 IN3
1 GND 11
CN10-19 CES1
RAPID TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
2 SYA 12 SYA*
HP20V 3 SYB 13 SYB*

CN8A 4 SYZ 14 SYZ* ANALOG
VCMD 14 CN8A-7 SE1
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND VOLTAGE INPUT
SPEED COMMAND
.. .. VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 CN8A-8 SE2
0V ~ +10V
(RIGID TAPPING:10V)
7 SE1 17 AG GND
8 SE2 18 PAH 9 CN8A-2 SYA
ENCODER
9 19 PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT PAL 10 CN8A-12 SYA*
ENCODER
PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
10 20 PBH 7 CN8A-3 SYB
ENCODER ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT PBL 8 CN8A-13 SYB*
PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
CONNECT FOR ORIENTATION OPTION LATHE 1 GND 11 GND PZH 5 CN8A-4 SYZ
ENCODER
ENCODER
CONNECT FOR RIGID TAPPING OPTION MILLING 2 MA 12 MA* PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT PZL 6 CN8A-14 SYZ*
PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
3 MB 13 MB* 23 CN8A-1
CABLE CN6 CN6 4 MZ 14 MZ* 0V GND
5 15 GND
HP20V .. .. CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
POSITION CODER 9 19 P5 REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE OF THE CABINET
10 P5 20 P5
CABLE CN6 AC SPINDLE UNIT

20PIN SHIELD CABLE MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPA
CN6
POSITION CODER (A) 2 MA
ENCODER
(N) 12 MA* PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
(C) 3 MB
ENCODER
(R) 13 MB* PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
PG
(B) 4 MZ
ENCODER
(P) 14 MZ* PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
(H) 10 P5
(K) 1 GND
19 P5
11 GND
20 P5
15 GND
CONNECTOR CASE
0V
CONNECT TO THE
EARTH PLATE OF
THE CABINET
9-15
APPENDIX
13.4 CONNECTION WITH MITSUBISHI SPINDLE MDS-A-SPJA SERIES

EPS3/EPS4 BOARD MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA EPS3/EPS4 BOARD SHIELD CABLE MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA
CNS1 CN1 CNS1
1 AG 14 VCMD 20B REDY 20A SRN +24V 15 CN1-2A FC SPINDLE TROUBLE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
ALARM
2 DOCOM15 +24V 19B SRI 19A IN1 FA 21 CN1-2B FA --> OFF
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
3 ORC 16 SRN Dsub25P F40 18B IN2 18A IN3 (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL CN1-5A P24
4 +5V 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 17B 17A ZS 22 CN1-8A ZS OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
ZS1 ZERO SPEED INPUT
5 PZH 18 ESP 16B 16A CES1 (F44.6) SIGNAL
ORIENTATION ORIENTATION
6 PZL 19 SET NOTE) 15B 15A ORIENTATION
ORA 13 CN1-7B OUT1 COMPLETE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
COMPLETE
ORA1 --> ON
7 PBH 20 0V 14B 14A (F44.4)
COMPLETE
INPUT SIGNAL
SPEED MATCH
8 PBL 21 FA 13B 13A USC 25 CN1-8B US SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT SIGNAL
--> ON
USO SPEED MATCH
9 PAH 22 ZS 12B 12A (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL COMMON 24
10 PAL 23 0V 11B 11A 20 CN1-3A
11 HSP 24 COMMON 10B 10A 0V RG
12 25 USC 9B 9A DOCOM 2
*ESP EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL
13 ORA 8B US 8A ZS (G43.4) EMERGENCY STOP --> OFF ESP 18 CN1-19A IN1
EMERGENCY STOP
7B OUT1 7A INPUT SIGNAL
SET1 MACHINE PREPARAITON
6B 6A (G42.4) COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL SET 19 CN1-20B REDY MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION --> ON
NOT) CN1 SYMBOL 5B 5A P24 COMPLETION
INPUT SIGNAL
SRN CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND
CONNECTOR HIF3C-40D-2.54C 4B 4A (G43.6) OUPUT SIGNAL POWER FAILURE SRN 16 CN1-20A SRN
COMMAND --> ON
PIN HIF3-2226SCA 3B 3A RG CLOCKWISE ROTATION
COMMAND INPUT SIGNAL
MAKER HIROSE KOREA 2B FA 2A FC SRI
(G43.5) COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION SRI 17 CN1-19B SRI
COUNTERCLOCKWISE
1B 1A COMMAND --> ON ROTATION COMMAND
ORC1 ORIENT COMMAND OUTPUT INPUT SIGNAL
1 GND 11 GND (G43.7) SIGNAL ORC 3 CN1-18B IN2
ORIENT COMMAND --> ON ORIENT COMMAND
2 SYA 12 SYA* HSP RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
NOT REQUIRED WHEN RIGID TAPPING HP20V 3 SYB 13 SYB* (G42.2) RAPID TAPPING --> ON HSP 11 CN1-18A IN3
RAPID TAPPING
WITH BUILT IN ENCODER CN3 4 SYZ 14 SYZ* CN1-16A CES1 INPUT SIGNAL
.. ..
ANALOG ANALOG
POSITION CODER 8 18 SE1 VCMD 14 CN3-18 SE1
SPEED COMMAND SPEED COMMAND
9 SE2 19 VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 CN3-9 SE2 VOLTAGE INPUT
10 20 AG GN
PAH 9 CN3-2 SYA

ENCODER ENCODER
1 GND 11 GND PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT PAL 10 CN3-12 SYA* PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
2 PC 12 PC* PBH 7 CN3-3 SYB

ENCODER ENCODER
3 PB 13 PB* PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT PBL 8 CN3-13 SYB* PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
HP20V 4 PA 14 PA* PZH 5 CN3-4 SYZ

ENCODER ENCODER
CN2 5 MOH 15 RG PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT PZL 6 CN3-14 SYZ* PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
AC SPINDLE MOTOR 6 MA 16 MA* 23 CN3-1

7 MB 17 MB* 0V GN
8 MZ 18 MZ*
9 P5 CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
19 REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR CABLE
OF THE CABINET
10 P5 20 P5
BUILT IN ENCODER
CABLE CN6 AC SPINDLE UNIT

20PIN SHIELD CABLE MITSUBISHI MDS-A-SPJA
CN2
POSITION CODER (A) 4 PA
ENCODER
(N) 14 PA* PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT
(C) 3 PB
ENCODER
(R) 13 PB* PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT
P
(B) 2 PC
ENCODER
(P) 12 PC*
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT
(H) 10 P5
(K) 1 GND
20 P5
11 GND
CONNECTOR CASE
0V
CONNECT TO THE
EARTH PLATE OF
THE CABINET
9-16
13. SPINDLE UNIT CONNECTION
13.5 FUJI 5000M3
13.5 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000M3

EPS3/EPS4 BOARD FUJI FRENIC 5000M3 EPS3/EPS4 BOARD CABLE CNS1 FUJI FRENIC 5000M3
CNS1 CN1 CNS1 20PIN SHIELD CABLE CN1
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 ASS1 23 ASM
2 DOCOM15 +24V 2 +24V 15 34 P
13 24 FWD ALARM ALARM
AL 21 30 AL OUTPUT
3 16 SRN Dsub25P H50F 3 14 25 REV
*AL ALARM SIGNAL
--> OFF
4 +5V 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 4 15 26 (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL

SST 22 28 SST OUTPUT
5 PZH 18 5 16 27 RST SST ZERO SPEED SIGNAL
--> ON
6 PZL 19 6 17 28 SST (F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL

SPEED MATCH
SPEED MATCH
7 PBH 20 0V 7 CM 18 29 SAR SAR 25 29 SAR --> ON
SAR SPEED MATCH OUTPUT
SIGNAL
8 PBL 21 AL 8 19 30 AL (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL
9 PAH 22 SST 9 20 31 COMMON 24
10 PAL 23 10 21 32
11 RST 24 COMMON 11 22 33 ALARM RESET INPUT
RST 11 27 RST SIGNAL
12 25 SAR 12 34 P RST ALARM RESET OUTPUT
SIGNAL RESET --> OFF
RV OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.5) INPUT SIGNAL
13 CLOCKWISE ROTATION
CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND SRN 16 24 FWD COMMAND
SRN OUTPUT SIGNAL RV INPUT SIGNAL
(G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL SRI 17 25 REV
CABLE CNS1P SRI COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION RV COUNTERCLOCKWISE
ROTATION COMMAND
COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL DOCOM 2 7 CM INPUT SIGNAL
(G43.5) COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION OUTPUT SIGNAL
NOTE) SET PARAMETER NO. 9103 AS FOLLOWS. COMMAND 0V
--> ON
INPUT SIGNAL
9103 SP1 SP0

1 0 POSITION CODER ANALOG VCMD 14 1 ASS1
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
(FOR LATHE) SPEED COMMAND
1 23 ASM VOLTAGE INPUT
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
AG 0V
20
0V
CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
OF THE CABINET
13.6 CONNECTION WITH FUJI SPINDLE FRENIC 5000MS5

EPS3/EPS4 BOARD FUJI FRENIC 5000MS5 EPS3/EPS4 BOARD CABLE CNS1 FUJI FRENIC 5000MS5
CNS1 SHIELD CABLE CN3
CNS1 CN3
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 FWD 11 SST +24V 15 14 CMO
ALARM ALARM
2 DOCOM15 +24V 2 REV 12 SAR AL 21 13 AL OUTPUT SIGNAL --> OFF
*AL ALARM
3 16 SRN Dsub25P HP20V 3 RST 13 AL (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL
SST 22 11 SST OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
4 +5V 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 4 EMG 14 CMO SST ZERO SPEED
(F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL
5 PZH 18 5 CMS 15 SAR 25 12 SAR
SPEED MATCH
OUTPUT
SPEED MATCH
--> ON
SAR
6 PZL 19 6 16 (F44.7)
SPEED MATCH
INPUT SIGNAL COMMON 24
SIGANL
7 PBH 20 0V 7 ASS 17 20
8 PBL 21 AL 8 ASM 18 0V
9 PAH 22 SST 9 19 ALARM RESET

RST 11 3 RST INPUT SIGNAL
10 PAL 23 10 20 RST
ALARM RESET OUTPUT SIGNAL
RESET --> OFF
RV OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G42.5) INPUT SIGNAL CLOCKWISE ROTATION
11 RST 24 COMMON CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND SRN 16 1 FWD COMMAND
SRN OUTPUT SIGNAL RV INPUT SIGNAL
12 25 SAR (G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
--> ON COUNTERCLOCKWISE
13 INPUT SIGNAL SRI 17 2 REV
RV
ROTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
SRI DOCOM2
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION OUTPUT SIGNAL
(G43.5) COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL
4 EMG EXTERNAL ALARM
COMMAND
RV INPUT SIGNAL
--> ON 5 CMS OUTPUT SIGNAL
CABLE CNS1P INPUT SIGNAL
0V
NOTE) SET PARAMETER NO. 9103 AS FOLLOWS. ANALOG

ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND VCMD 14 7 ASS
SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 8 ASM VOLTAGE INPUT
9103 SP1 SP0
AG 0V
1 0 POSITION CODER
(FOR LATHE)
PLATE OF THE CABINET
9-17
APPENDIX
13.7 CONNECTION WITH YASAKAWA VS626M5

EPS3/EPS4 BOARD YASAKAWA VS626 (CIMR-M5) EPS3/EPS4 BOARD SHIELD CABLE YASAKAWA VS626M5
CNS1 6CN CNS1 (CIMR-M5)
1 AG 14 VCMD 1 26 +24V 15
2 DOCOM15 +24V HP50V 2 27 COMMON 24 6CN
*FA SPINDLE TROUBLE
3 ORC 16 SRN Dsub25P (3M50F) 3 SCOM 28 (F44.5) INPUT SIGNAL FA 21 45 FLTCOM SPINDLE
ALARM
TROUBLE
4 17 SRI CABLE CNS1 4 0V 29 44 FLTNC
OUTPUT
--> OFF
ZS1 ZERO SPEED
5 PZH 18 ESP 5 30 (F44.6) INPUT SIGNAL ZS 22 33 ZSPD SIGNAL
6 PZL 19 SET 6 RDY 31 OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
ORA1 ORIENTATION
7 PBH 20 0V 7 EMG 32 (F44.4) COMPLETE ORA 13 39 ORE
ORIENTATION ORIENTATION
INPUT SIGNAL
8 PBL 21 FA 8 FWD 33 ZSPD COMPLETE COMPLETE
USO SPEED MATCH OUTPUT SIGNAL --> ON
9 PAH 22 ZS 9 REV 34 AGR (F44.7) INPUT SIGNAL USC 25 34 AGR
SPEED MATCH
10 PAL 23 0V 10 35 20 42 COM1 SPEED MATCH
--> ON
OUTPUT SIGNAL
11 HSP 24 COMMON 11 36 0V
EMERGENCY STOP OUTPUT SIGNAL 2 22 24VCOM +24V
12 25 USC 12 SSC 37 *ESP EMERGENCY STOP
DOCOM
(G43.4) --> OFF
ESP 18 7 EMG
13 ORA 13 38 INPUT SIGNAL EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT SIGNAL
14 39 ORE SET1
MACHINE PREPARATION
COMPLETION OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
15 40 (G42.4) COMPLETE --> ON SET 19 6 RDY MACHINE PREPARATION

COMPLETION
16 ORT 41 SRN
OUTPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
OUTPUT SIGNAL
17 42 COM1 (G43.6) CLOCKWISE ROTATION COMMAND --> ON SRN 16 8 FWD CLOCKWISE ROTATION
INPUT SIGNAL
COMMAND
18 43 SRI COMMAND OUTPUT SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL
COUNTERCLOCKWISE ROTATION OUTPUT SIGNAL
19 EXTCOM 44 FLTNC (G43.5) COMMAND --> ON
SRI 17 9 REV COUNTERCLOCKWISE
INPUT SIGNAL ROTATION COMMAND
20 45 FLTCOM ORIENTATION COMMAND INPUT SIGNAL
ORC1 OUTPUT SIGNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL
21 46 ORC 3 16 ORT
(G43.7) ORIENTATION COMMAND --> ON
ORIENTATION COMMAND
INPUT SIGNAL
INPUT SIGNAL
22 24VCOM 47 RAPID TAPPING OUTPUT SIGNAL
HSP
RAPID TAPPING --> ON
23 48 (G42.2) INPUT SIGNAL
HSP 11 12 SSC RAPID TAPPING
INPUT SIGNAL
24 0VCOM 49 19 EXTCOM OUTPUT SIGNAL
25 50 24 OVCOM
0V
HP36V 1CN ANALOG VCMD 14 3 SCOM
ANALOG
SPEED COMMAND
(3M36F) 11 PCO SPEED COMMAND
VOLTAGE INPUT
VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1 4 0V
12 *PCO AG 0V
0V ~ +10V
(RIGID TAPPING:10V)
13 PAO
14 *PAO 1CN
15 PBO PAH 9 13 PAO
ENCODER ENCODER
16 *PBO PHASE A SIGNAL INPUT PAL 10 14 *PAO PHASE A SIGNAL OUTPUT
17 SS PBH 7 15 PBO
ENCODER ENCODER
PHASE B SIGNAL INPUT PBL 8 16 *PBO PHASE B SIGNAL OUTPUT
CABLE CNS1P PZH 5 11 PCO

ENCODER ENCODER
PHASE Z SIGNAL INPUT PZL 6 12 *PCO PHASE Z SIGNAL OUTPUT
POSITION CODER 23 17
(FOR LATHE) 0V SS(FG)
NOTE)USE SPINDLE DO(ESP,SET,SRN,)

CONNECT TO THE EARTH PLATE
AS COLLECTOR COMMON.
SEE PAGE 6-11. OF THE CABINET
13.8 CONNECTION WITH POSITION CODER
MAIN UNIT CABLE CNS1P POSITION CODER

EPS3 BOARD SHIELD CABLE
CNS1
PZH 5 (B)
PZL 6 (P)
PAH 9 (A)
PAL 10 (N)
PG
PBH 7 (C)
PBL 8 (R)
+5V 4 (H)
0V 23 (K)

CCONNECT TO THE EARTH

PLATE OF THE CABINET
REPRESENTS TWISTED PAIR

*) 20P SHIELD CABLE
*) LENGTH MAX 14m
*) NUMBER OF CALBES OF +5V AND 0V
3 EACH IN CASE THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE IS 8m OR LES
6 EACH IN CASE THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE IS GREATER
9-18
14. DNC FUNCITON
14.1 WHAT IS DNC?
14. DNC FUNCTION
14.1 WHAT IS DNC?
Normally, NC operates automatically by executing the built-in programs.

Unlike NC, DNC (Direct Numerical Control) executes programs it received
from external devices such as PCs through a communication network
while operating automatically.
Complex processes such as the mold are usually created with CAM, and the complex
processing curve is created by connecting short linear
interpolating (G01) microblocks.
As a consequence, the program becomes longer and cannot be built into the NC Memory,
and this is where DNC is required. Also, the program DNC received through the communication
network will be cleared from NC memory as soon as it is executed for each block.
(Magnified)
Fig. Example of microblock process
14.2 Preparation for DNC Operation
1) Scope of Effect of Communication Data
%
;
O0001
(PROGRAM)
G40 Scope of Effect (Subject of Execution)

;
%
Concerning the data received from an external device through communication line,
NC considers the data between ;(end of block) which comes after the first %(end of record)
and the second % as the scope of effect.
9-19
APPENDIX
2) STANDARD PARAMETERS FOR COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN PC AND SENTROL2
NO.0000 <TVC> = 0 (DOES NOT CHECK TV)
NO.0000 <CTV> = 0 (DID NOT CHECK TV IN COMMENTS)
NO.0000 <ISP> = 0 (THERE IS PARITY BIT)
NO.0000 <NCR> = 1 (EOB : LF)
NO.0000 <EIA> = 0 (ISO CODE)
NO.0020 = 0 (INPUT THROUGH COM1)
NO.0021 = 0 (OUTPUT THROUGH COM1)
NO.5001 = 1 (SELECT NO.5110~5112 PARAMETER GROUP)
NO.5110 = 3
NO.5111 = 2 (NUMBER OF STOP BIT: 2)
NO.5112 = 11 (9600 BAUD)
9-20

Sentrol 2: Maintenance

Uploaded by

Sentrol 2: Maintenance

Uploaded by

CNC CONTROLLER

Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment

Chapter 5 Hardware of SENTROL2

Chapter 8 Ordinary Repair

1. Basic Interface Connection 9-1

13. CONNECTION BETWEEN SENTROL2 AND SPINDLE UNIT 9-14

14. DNC FUNCTION 9-19

(Any unauthorized reproduction of this manual is prohibited.

For Safe Maintenance

About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes S-2

1 About Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

This is used to provide supplemental description in addition to Warnings and

2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Maintenance Work

2. When Machine operation is checked with the cover opened

3 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Replacement Work

4 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Parameters

5 Warnings Regarding Regular Maintenance Work

1. Replacing the Backplane for the Memory Backup Battery

2. Replacing the Battery for the Absolute Encoder

3. Replacing the Fuse

Chapter 1 Troubleshooting and Treatment

(1) When ALARM MESSAGE is displayed on the screen

1) NO. 714 SERVO ALARM is displayed .................................................. Chapter 2 1 (page 2-7)

2) SPINDLE ALARM is displayed. ............................................................... Chapter 3 (page 3-1)

3) NC-related ALARM is displayed. .........................................................................2.1 (page 1-2)

(2) Problems with NC function and malfunction

2) Cannot operate asynchronous move (threading) .....................................................4 (page 1-27)

3) Cannot operate automatically ..................................................................................4 (page 1-28)

4) Home location incorrect ..........................................................................................4 (page 1-29)

(3) Communication breakdown .......................................................................................5 (page 1-36)

Contact: TEL. (02) 869-5595

2. ALARM MESSAGE and Treatment

2.1 ALARM numbers`

ALARM Numbers Message Reference

0 ~ 299 (1) Program miss (PS ALARM) Page 1-3 ~

(2) Communication ALARM (SR SEND/

400 ~ (3) ALARM related to temperature and power Page 1-14 ~

500 ~ (4) Out-of-area ALARM (OT ALARM) Page 1-15 ~

550 ~ (5) ALARM related to external data input Page 1-16 ~

580 ~ (6) ALARM related to RIGID TAPPING Page 1-17 ~

700 ~ (7) ALARM related to SERVO Page 1-18 ~

9000 ~ (11) SYSTEM ALARM Page 1-20 ~

1000 ~ 2999 * ALARM related to machine and sequence Page 1-22 ~

No number * MESSAGE related to machine manipulation Page 1-22 ~

Note) Definitions of terms

2.2 ALARM LIST

1) PROGRAM MISS (P/S ALARM)

Number Message Displayed on the Screen Reference

TOO MANY DIGITS OR OVERLIMIT

TOO MANY WORDS IN 1 BLOCK

ILL MODE GOTO/WHILE DO

Basic address and reference scope

S CODE OUT OF RANGE

SQ NO. NOT FOUND

Number Message Displayed on the Screen Reference

L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared

ILL COMMAND IN G70~G76

L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared

L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared

ILL COMMAND IN PROG

L-Pro Chapter 3 1. Prepared

ILL COMMAND IN Q-BLOCK

PROG NOT FOUND

NO RADIUS COMMAND IN G02 G03

Number Message Displayed on the Screen Reference

TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING

Number Message Displayed on the Screen Reference

TOO MANY SUB, MACRO NESTING

TOO MANY MACRO NESTING

MISSING END STATEMENT

ILL EXPRESSION FORMAT

ILL LOOP NO.

TOO LONG MACRO SENTENCE

SQ NO. OUT OF RANGE

MISSING OPEN BRACKET

MISSING CLOSE BRACKET